Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1

Of the New Administrative Capital

TABLE OF CONTENTS

REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

010000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

011000 SUMMARY
011200 MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY
012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013233 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013520 HEALTH & SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014200 REFERENCES
014339 MOCKUPS
015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
017300 EXECUTION
017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017836 WARRANTIES
017839 RECORD (AS-BUILT) DOCUMENTS
017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

033050 MASSIVE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033125 PRECAST ULTRA-HIGH-PERFORMANCE CONCRETE CLADDING
034501 MISCELLANEOUS ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE
034910 DECORATIVE GLASS FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE
035216 LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE
035416 HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
035440 CEMENT-BASED SCREED

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY

042000 UNIT MASONRY

044200 EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING

DIVISION 05 - METALS

051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

053100 STEEL DECKING
055000 METAL FABRICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 1 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-TOC-PMC-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE

055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

055300 METAL GRATINGS
057300 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
057310 DECORATIVE METAL BALUSTRADES AND FENCES
057500 DECORATIVE FORMED METAL

DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTICS

061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY

064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
066200 CAST PLASTIC (GRP) FABRICATIONS
067300 COMPOSITE DECKING

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

071113 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

071355 APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING
071614 POLYMER MODIFIED CEMENT WATERPROOFING -
ARCHITECTURAL
071616 CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
071800 TRAFFIC COATINGS
072100 THERMAL INSULATION
074213.16 METAL PLATE WALL PANELS
074213.23 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS
075323 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
077100 ROOF SPECIALTIES
077129 MANUFACTURED ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS
077200 ROOF ACCESSORIES
078100 APPLIED FIREPROOFING
078123 INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING
078413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078446 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
078800 FIRE CURTAINS
079200 JOINT SEALANTS
079500 EXPANSION CONTROL

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
083113 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
083323 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
083326 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES
083473 SOUND-CONTROL DOOR ASSEMBLIES
084114 INTERIOR ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084126 ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084229.23 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 2 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-TOC-PMC-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE

084233 REVOLVING DOOR ENTRANCES

084415 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS AND WINDOW WALLS
084429 MECHANICALLY ATTACHED STRUCTURAL GLASS ASSEMBLIES
084436 OVERHEAD GLAZING ASSEMBLIES
085113 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
087110 DOOR HARDWARE
088000 GLAZING
088300 MIRRORS
088400 PLASTIC GLAZING
089119 FIXED LOUVERS

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

092400 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
092713 GLASS-REINFORCED GYPSUM FABRICATIONS
092900 GYPSUM BOARD
092940 CEMENT BOARD ASSEMBLIES
093000 TILING
093014 LANDSCAPE TILING
095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
095133 ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILINGS
095423 LINEAR METAL CEILINGS
095427 SUSPENDED WOOD CEILINGS
095443 STRETCHED-FABRIC CEILING SYSTEMS
096340 STONE FLOORING
096400 WOOD FLOORING
096513 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
096516 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
096536 STATIC-CONTROL RESILIENT FLOORING
096723 RESINOUS FLOORING
096813 TILE CARPETING
096816 SHEET CARPETING
096900 ACCESS FLOORING
097225 SIMULATED STONE CLADDING
097500 STONE FACING
097700 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED (FRP) WALL PANELS
097723 FABRIC-WRAPPED PANELS
097763 TERRACOTTA BAGUETTE
099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING
099123 INTERIOR PAINTING
099300 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING
099600 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

101100 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 3 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-TOC-PMC-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE

101400 SIGNAGE
102113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102600 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
102800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
102819 TUB AND SHOWER DOORS
104400 FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
104413 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS (Iconic Tower)
104413 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS (Office Towers)
104413 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS (Residential Towers)
104900 PARKING ACCESSORIES
105113 METAL LOCKERS
107113 EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES
108214 LED MEDIA MESH SCREENS

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

110000 AUTOMATED PARKING SYSTEM (Office Towers)

110101 FAÇADE ACCESS EQUIPMENT
111200 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
111300 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT
111400 PEDESTRIAN CONTROL DEVICES
114000 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT (Iconic Tower)
117000 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT (Iconic Tower)
118226 FACILITY WASTE COMPACTORS
118230 WASTE HANDLING EQUIPMENT
118230 WASTE HANDLING EQUIPMENT (Iconic Tower)

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

122413 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES

123640 STONE COUNTERTOPS
123661 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
124813 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
124816 ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES
129300 SITE FURNISHINGS

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

131213 EXTERIOR FOUNTAIN

133423 FABRICATED STRUCTURES

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

142100 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS

143100 ESCALATORS
149182 TRASH CHUTES

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 4 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-TOC-PMC-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

210513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

EQUIPMENT
210517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
210518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
210548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
210553 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
211200 FIRE SUPPERSSION STANDPIPES
211313 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
212200 CLEAN-AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
213113 ELECTRIC-DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS
213400 PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

220513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

220516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220519 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220716 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION
220719 PLUMBING PIPE INSULATION
221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
221123 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
221123.13 DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS
221223 FACILITY INDOOR POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS
221316 SANITARY WASTE, VENT AND STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES (Iconic Tower)
221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES (Office Towers)
221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES (Residential Towers)
221423 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES (Iconic Tower)
221423 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES (Office Towers)
221423 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES (Residential Towers)
221429 SUMP PUMPS
223100 DOMESTIC WATER SOFTENERS
223200 DOMESTIC WATER TREATMENT EQUIPMENT
223300 ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS
223400 FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS
223500 DOMESTIC-WATER HEAT EXCHANGERS
224100 RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES (Iconic Tower)

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 5 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-TOC-PMC-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE

224100 RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES (Office Towers)

224100 RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES (Residential Towers)
225000 SWIMMING POOL SPECIALTIES AND EQUIPMENT
225100 JACUZZI SPECIALTIES AND EQUIPMENT

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

230516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
230517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING
230518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING
230519 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
230523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230713 DUCT INSULATION
230716 HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION
230719 HVAC PIPE INSULATION
230900 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
230901 INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (IBMS)
232113 HYDRONIC PIPING
232123 HYDRONIC PUMPS
232300 REFRIGERANT PIPING
232500 HVAC WATER TREATMENT
233113 METAL DUCTS
233130 AIR DUCT CLEANING
233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233413 AXIAL HVAC FANS
233416 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS
233423 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
233433 AIR CURTAINS
233600 AIR TERMINAL UNITS
233713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES (Iconic Tower)
233713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES (Office Towers)
233713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES (Residential Towers)
233813 COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS
235100 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS
235239 FIRE-TUBE BOILERS
235700 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
236313 AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS
237200 AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT
237313 MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237413 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
238123 COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONERS
238126 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 6 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-TOC-PMC-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE

238146 WATER-SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS

238219 FAN-COIL UNITS

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

260500 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

260513 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
260519 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260536 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260543 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
260548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260940 ROOM MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
260943 NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
261200 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
261300 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262413 SWITCHBOARDS
262416 PANELBOARDS
262419 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
262500 ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
262726 WIRING DEVICES
262743 ELECTRIC VEHICLE CHARGING STATIONS
262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
263324 DC CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING
263353 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
263533 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS
264113 LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES
264313 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING
265600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS

271005 COMMON CLAUSES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING

271055 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
271105 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS
271305 COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING
271505 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
271800 COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS
272000 DATA COMMUNICATIONS
272133 WIRELESS DATA NETWORK
272231 COMPUTERS & RELATED PERIPHERALS
273123 IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
274100 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS
274116.21 INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT - FOR
MEETING ROOMS

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 7 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-TOC-PMC-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE

274116.28 INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT - FOR

HOTEL SPACES
274132 IP-BASED HOSPITALITY TV MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (IPHTM)
275117 IP-BASED PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
275123.80 IP BASED VIDEO INTERCOM

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

281300 ACCESS CONTROL

281353 SECURITY SCREENING SYSTEMS (SSS)
282300 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
283111 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

312000 EARTH MOVING

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

321116.16 AGGREGATE SUBBASE COURSE

321123 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
321216 ASPHALT PAVING
321400 UNIT PAVING
321440 STONE PAVING
323113 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
329113 SOIL PREPARATION
329300 PLANTS

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES

334300 LANDSCAPE DRAINAGE

334600 SUBDRAINAGE

DIVISION 34 - TRANSPORTATION

348313 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION

348323 BRIDGE BEARINGS

DIVISION 40 - PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS

405000 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS SCOPE OF WORK

406343 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS (PLC)
406710 PROCESS CONTROL WIRING
407000 INSTRUMENTATION FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 8 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-TOC-PMC-01 REV 1
SPECIFICATIONS
(Part 3 of 12)
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies incidental rough carpentry required for support or attachment of
other construction and not specified in other sections and includes, but is not limited to, the
following items:

1. Wood Framing.
2. Wood Grounds, Nailers, and Blocking.
3. Wood Furring.
4. Wood Subframes.
5. Vanity and countertop substrate.
6. Plywood Backing Panels.
7. Mirror Substrate.

B. Definitions:

1. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed,
unless otherwise specified.
2. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 38 mm actual size in least dimension.
3. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 38 mm actual size or greater but less than 114 mm
actual size in least dimension.
4. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.
5. Timber: Lumber of 114 mm actual size or greater in least dimension.

C. Related sections include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for framing fabricated from structural steel.
2. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork".
3. Any other Specification Section where reference is made to this Section or where
ancillary concealed woodwork is required or construed from the Section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit in compliance with Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures.”

B. Product Data: For all materials and components used in the work.

1. Comply with Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - Page 1 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

C. Wood Certificates: Submit evidence that woods used in the works under this Section are
obtained from wood batches that are kiln dried.

D. Samples of all materials used in the work of this Section.

E. Shop drawings for framing and furring including details, sizes of wood sections, panel,
spacings and method of attachment.

F. Wood treatment data as follows, including chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions

for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated materials:

1. For each type of preservative-treated wood product, include certification by treating

plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of
preservative retained, and compliance with applicable standards.

G. Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency acceptable to the
Engineer, indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of fire-retardant-
treated wood products with requirements indicated. Test report shall include manufacturer
name and contacts in addition to tested product name and detailed description.

H. Warranty of chemical treatment manufacturer for each type of treatment.

I. Structural calculation for load-bearing framing.

J. Qualification Data:

1. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with
project name, addresses, names of Engineer and Employers, and other information
specified.
2. For Testing Agency Qualifications include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

1.4 LOCAL REGULATIONS AND CODES

A. Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, and regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.

1. Obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Comply with Egyptian Codes and Standards requirements and latest circulars.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Comply with Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements.”

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems

similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As
applicable, procure products from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements,
warranty requirements, and technical or factory-authorized service representative
requirements. Experience: Minimum of 10 years.

ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - Page 2 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

C. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, applying,

or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project,
whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
Experience: Minimum of 5 years.

D. Preservative Treatment Applicator: Not less than 10 years of successful experience in

applying preservative treatment of type used in the project in prestigious high-end projects
in Egypt.

E. Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for approval, an independent testing agency must
demonstrate to the Engineer's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted criteria
conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily
conduct the testing indicated without delaying the Work.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect from weather and contact with damp or wet
surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and
around stacks and under temporary coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD

A. Softwood shall be free from decay and insect attack, except pinhole borers, with no knots
wider than half the width of the section. Softwood shall comply with requirements of BS
EN 942, recommended grade for application; softwood species to be used in external
locations are to be recommended for the purpose.

B. Hardwood shall comply with BS EN 942. Hardwood to be used in internal locations are to
be recommended for the purpose.

2.2 RIGID SHEETS

A. Plywood: BS EN 636:2012+A1:2015, face grade for general use. Bonding is to be to BS

1203, type WBP for external use and type MR or INT for internal use.

B. Marine Quality Plywood: To BS 1088, excluding plywood made from gabion.

1. Use marine quality plywood for any application showing plywood in a wet area
similar to toilets.
2. Use marine quality plywood for any application showing plywood in an exterior
woodwork detail.

2.3 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D

Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 19-
mm nominal thickness.

ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - Page 3 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

B. Miscellaneous concealed plywood: Exterior exposure 1 sheathing, span rate to suit framing
in each location and thickness as indicated but not less than 19mm.

C. Miscellaneous exposed plywood: DOC PS 1, A-D interior thickness as indicated but not
less than 19 mm.

D. MDF: Where indicated, ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea-
formaldehyde resin.

2.4 FASTENERS

A. Nails: To BS 1202, Part 1, 2 or 3 generally, but non-ferrous types to Parts 2 or 3 for external
use.

B. Wood Screws: Non-ferrous types for external use.

C. Self-Tapping Screws: To BS EN ISO 1479.

D. Dowels: Mild steel, 10 mm diameter, 100 mm long, galvanised to BS EN ISO 1461 after
fabrication.

E. Cramps: Mild steel, 25 x 3 x 250 mm girth, turned up at one end and twice drilled for 3 mm
screws, fish-tailed at other end for building in and galvanised to BS EN ISO 1461 after
fabrication.

F. Plugs: Either traditional hardwood plugs, shaped to twist and grip when driven, or
proprietary fibre or plastics plugs, or other approved type.

2.5 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment: Shall be type listed in BS 8417: 2011+A1: 2014 (except coal tar
creosote), obtained from an approved manufacturer, to give suitable protection against
termites and other wood destroying organisms known in Egypt.

B. Use water borne or oil-borne solutions. Use borate-based preservative for indoor
applications and copper-nathenate-based preservative for exterior applications and where
woods may be buried below natural ground grade.

C. Preservative treatment for indoor application shall be fully compatible with fire retardant
treatment that shall be applied subsequently.

D. Fire retardant preservative to be applied on internally used borate-based preservatives is to

be also borate-based.

E. Where a manufacturer’s recommends one product for both preservative and fire retardant
treatments, the recommended product shall be listed by the American Wood Preservatives
Association (AWPA), or other equivalent international organization, as recommended for
both applications as specified in Contract Documents.

F. No preservative treatment shall be applied to hardwoods certified by manufacturer as not

accepting treatments.

ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - Page 4 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2.6 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27
(plywood).

1. Refer to fire and life safety report for every tower type that determines the minimum
Code Requirements (Class A or B), Class C shall not be accepted.
2. Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for enclosed roof framing, framing in
attic spaces, and where indicated.
3. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and

inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back
of each piece.

C. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations
that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

D. Application: Treat all rough carpentry, unless otherwise indicated, but not limited to the
following:

1. Concealed blocking.
2. Framing for non-load-bearing partitions.
3. Plywood backing panels.

2.7 ADHESIVES

A. Compliance Standards:

1. BS EN 14256 Adhesives for non-structural wood applications. Test method and

requirements for resistance to static load.
2. BS EN 204 Classification of non-structural adhesives for joining of wood and
derived timber products.

B. Provide adhesives that do not contain urea-formaldehyde resins. Do not use animal
adhesive. Use epoxy resin based adhesives to maximum extent possible.

C. Provide adhesives that suit moisture content of the joined wood.

D. Adhesives for Interior Rough Carpentry, General: Type-2 water resistant glue.

E. Adhesives for Exterior Rough Carpentry, General: Type-1 waterproof glue and silicone
caulk to prevent moisture penetration.

F. Obtain manufacturer's confirmation that adhesive is compatible with preservative treatment.

2.8 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT APPLICATION

A. Woods and engineered wood materials used in rough carpentry works shall be preservative
treated as specified.

ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - Page 5 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

B. Application of preservative treatment is to be accomplished by a certified applicator

approved by Engineer.

C. Application is to be carried out after cutting and machining, but before assembly, by a
processor licensed by the treatment solution manufacturer.

D. Solution strengths and treatment by pressure, vacuum or immersion process are to be

selected to achieve service life and to suit wood treatability.

E. Moisture content of wood at time of treatment is to be as specified for use in the work.

F. After treatment, allow wood to dry before use.

G. For each batch of wood, provide certificate of assurance that treatment has been carried out
as specified.

H. Re-treat all treated wood which is sawn along the length, made thick, planed or otherwise
extensively processed.

I. Treat wood surfaces exposed by minor cutting and drilling with two flood coats of solution
recommended for the purpose by the treatment solution manufacturer.

2.9 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with requirements of BS 1186.

B. Comply also with AWI “Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install rough carpentry in accordance with:

1. Comply with details indicated on shop drawings prepared by Contractor and

approved by Engineer.
2. Applicable details and recommended actions in BS 1186.
3. Construct from preservative and moisture treated wood for exterior installations and
from preservative treated wood for interior installation.

B. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry and that are too
small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

C. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted.

D. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit.
Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow
attachment of other construction.

E. Apply field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood.

ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - Page 6 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

F. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated.

G. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not
fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish
materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting
wood; predrill as required.

H. Use hot-dip galvanised nails.

I. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler.

3.2 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS

A. Install wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and sleepers where shown and where required for
screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes shown and cut as required for true line
and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces,
unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work.
Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement.

C. Install permanent grounds of dressed, preservative-treated, key-bevelled lumber not less

than 1.38 mm wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of
finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.

3.3 WOOD FURRING

A. Comply with details on Drawings and approved shop drawings.

B. Dimensions of wood sections for load bearing framing shall not be less than dimensions
substantiated with the structural calculations.

C. Install backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring
backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification
marking of testing agency exposed to view.

D. Equipment Backing Panels: Provide fire retardant-treated 19 mm thick fire retardant treated
plywood panels to each wall scheduled to receive electrical, telephone, communications,
data, or similar equipment.

1. Do not install panels within 600 mm of the floor nor within 600 mm of a door frame.
2. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in above-referenced guide.
3. Provide a fire-retardant paint where indicated.

3.4 WOOD FRAMING

A. Install wood framing with crown edge up and provide not less than 100 mm of bearing on
supports. Provide continuous members, unless otherwise indicated; tie together over
supports if not continuous.

B. Where beams or girders are framed into pockets of exterior concrete or masonry walls,
provide 13-mm air space at sides and ends of wood members.

ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - Page 7 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

C. Fabricate wood framing under metal cladding to provide slopes indicated on Drawings. Fix
firmly to substrates with zinc-plated, pre-drilled, expansion-type fasteners.

3.5 WOOD SUBFRAMES

A. Material: Fabricate from preservative treated softwood to details indicated on Drawings or

approved shop Drawings.

B. Thickness shall be 22 mm net, minimum. Provide single dove-tail joints.

C. Faces in contact of masonry or concrete jambs shall have bitumen coating protection.

3.6 VANITY AND COUNTER TOP SUBSTRATE

A. Fix vanities and countertops to marine quality plywood substrates by water-cleanable epoxy
adhesive.

3.7 SUBSTRATES FOR MIRRORED GLASS

A. Install to walls to receive mirrored glass fixed with mastic adhesive.

B. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, Install 12.00-mm thick plywood to wood furring
as specified with galvanised fasteners and countersink heads of fasteners in plywood.

1. Use marine quality plywood for installations in bathrooms and toilets.

C. Finished plywood surface shall be uniform, to lines, smooth and free from any
imperfections that may harm mirrors.

D. Where substrate wall is perfectly plumb and to lines, plywood boards may be directly
installed to wall using galvanized steel screws and pre-drilled expansion type hard nylon
wall plugs at suitable intervals. Counter sink heads of screws in plywood.

END OF SECTION 061000

ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - Page 8 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

SECTION 064023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general requirements of materials, workmanship and shop finishing of
Interior Architectural Woodwork including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Wardrobes, Kitchens, Cabinets and similar woodworks.

2. Counters.
3. Shelving.
4. Wall paneling.
5. Skirting.
6. Standing and running trim.
7. Ornamental woodwork.
8. Shoe rack.
9. Book Shelves.
10. Mihrab.
11. Fire retardant wood cladding.
12. Other interior woodwork items indicated on Drawings.
13. Shop finishing of interior architectural woodwork

B. Interior architectural woodworks shall be constructed according to dimensions, materials

and details indicated on Design Drawings, Finish Schedules, approved shop drawings and
requirements of this Section.

C. Related Sections include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry".

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit in compliance with Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures.”

B. Product Data: For materials used in interior architectural woodwork including, but is not
limited to, panel products, high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic
laminate, cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing materials and processes.

1. Comply with Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

C. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.

1. Show details full size.

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - Page 1 of 20

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including
concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures and other items
installed in architectural woodwork.

D. Samples for Initial Selection:

1. Shop-applied transparent finishes.

2. High pressure laminates.
3. Plastic laminates.

E. Samples for Verification:

1. Cut samples of high pressure laminates or veneers required for the works.
2. Samples of hardware.
3. One sample of each interior architectural woodwork units.

F. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.

G. Qualification Data:

1. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with
project name, addresses, names of Engineer and Employers, and other information
specified.
2. For Testing Agency Qualifications include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

H. Material test reports from a qualified accredited independent testing agency, approved by
Engineer, indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements
indicated. Test report shall include manufacturer name and contacts in addition to tested
product name and detailed description.

I. Cleaning and maintenance instructions.

1.4 LOCAL REGULATIONS AND CODES

A. Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, and regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.

1. Obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Comply with Egyptian Codes and Standards requirements and latest circulars.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Comply with Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements.”

B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products
similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-
service performance in prestigious projects for not less than 10 years.

C. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - Page 2 of 20

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An accredited, independent agency with the experience and
capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E329; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to
authorities.

E. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided

responsibility for production of interior architectural woodwork with sequence-matched
wood veneers and wood doors with face veneers that are sequence matched with woodwork
and transparent-finished wood doors that are required to be of same species as woodwork.

F. Surface burning characteristics except for wood veneers, provide surface burning
characteristics (Flame spread and Smoke development Indices) as per NFPA 5000 when
tested to ASTM E84 according to the following:

1. Refer to fire and life safety report for every tower type that determines the minimum
Code Requirements (Class A or B), Class C shall not be accepted.

G. Mockups: Before fabricating and installing interior architectural woodwork, build mockups
for each form of construction and finish required to verify selections made under sample
Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.
Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the
completed Work:

1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed
by Engineer.
2. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting interior architectural
woodwork fabrication.
3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage
woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other
than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with
requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed,

wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between
16 and 32 deg C and relative humidity between 43 and 70 percent during the remainder of
the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify

dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by

field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - Page 3 of 20

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other
related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural
woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Comply with Division 01 Section "Warranties".

B. Woodwork Warranty: Provide complete warranty in which Manufacturer, Contractor and

Installer are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace without
limitations, all or any part of the woodwork specified in this section which fails or becomes
defective in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. All architectural woodwork is guaranteed to be of good material and workmanship

and free from defects that render it unserviceable for the use for which it is intended.
2. Warranty shall also include:

a. Installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of

defective woodwork.
b. Wood, adhesives, sealants, insulation, fasteners, and all other components of
woodwork specified in this section.
c. Repair of other works and finishes that could be disturbed by works specified
in this section.

3. Natural variations in the color or texture of the wood are not to be considered defects.
4. Failure includes, but is not limited to:

a. Deterioration in woodwork materials and coatings; other than due to normal

ageing and weathering; and any defects in adhesion, sealants, fixings,
coverings and other components of the work.
b. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 6.4 mm in a 1067-by-2134-mm
section.

5. Warranty Period: Five (5) years Total Warranty from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:

1. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Manufacturers:

a. Wilsonart.
b. Abet Laminati Inc.
c. Formica.

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - Page 4 of 20

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2. Hardware:

a. Dorma
b. Blum
c. Hettich
d. Hafele

2.2 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK, GENERAL

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the “Architectural Woodwork
Standards” for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes,
installation, and other requirements.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Hardwood: Hardwood shall comply with BS EN 942. Hardwood is to be used in the works
are to be recommended for the purpose.

B. Wood Products: Comply with the following:

1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130 or better.

a. Thickness Swelling: 5.5% Maximum.

b. Modulus of Rupture (M-2): 1885 psi.
c. Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde complying with ANSI
A208.2.

2. Medium-Density Fiberboard, Moisture Resistant: To comply with the following:

a. Standard: ANSI A208.2, EN 316; EN 622-5.

b. Emission Class: E1 (EN 120).

3. Particleboard: Straw-based particleboard complying with requirements in ANSI

A208.1, Grade M-2, or BS EN 312:2010 Grade P2, density equal to 640-800 kg/m3.

a. Thickness Swelling: 5.5% Maximum.

b. Modulus of Rupture (M-2): 1885 psi.
c. Do not use particleboard in wet areas or for exterior applications.

4. Plywood:

a. Hardwood Plywood - ANSI/HPVA HP-1 (latest edition).

b. Softwood Plywood - US Plywood Standard APA PS-1 (latest edition).
c. Veneer-Faced Panel Products, General:

1) Grade: AA to the standards of Hardwood, Plywood & Veneer

Association (HPVA HP-1), USA, or the highest grade to any other
International Standards acceptable to the Engineer.
2) Cut: As specified for each application.
3) Board Thickness: As indicated on Drawings for different applications.
4) Preservative treatment is to comply with requirements specified in this
Section. Preservative treatment is not to change or affect the
characteristics and aesthetics of face veneer.

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - Page 5 of 20

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

5) Provide fire retardant treated plywood that are factory treated and
labeled as compliant with fire performance characteristics specified in
this Section.
6) Finish: As indicated or specified.

d. Face Wood Veneers, General: Are to comply with the following requirements:

1) Grade: Grade AA to the standards of Hardwood, Plywood & Veneer

Association (HPVA), USA, or the highest grade to any other
International Standards approved to the Engineer.
2) Cut: As specified for each application.
3) Thickness: 0.60 mm, minimum.
4) Species: Face wood veneers are to be as indicated on Drawings or
specified.
5) Length of leaves: Is to be long enough to cover the height of panel or
door panel or application required, unless otherwise end-matched pattern
is indicated or selected by the Engineer.
6) Matching of Leaves through Panel: As selected by the Engineer.
7) Veneer Leaves for Elevations: Generally, are to be from same flitch and
conform to the assignment selected by the Engineer.
8) Width of leaves: Generally, width of leaves for elevation panels is to be
as required to attain the matching-through-panel selected by the
Engineer at minimum number of leaves.
9) Veneer Edge Banding: Obtain from same manufacturer of wood veneer,
manufactured from same wood log as veneer.

5. Hardboard - ANSI A135.4 (latest edition).

6. Marine Quality Plywood: To BS 1088-1 and BS 1088-2, excluding plywood made
from gabion.

a. Use marine quality plywood for any application showing plywood in a wet
area similar to toilets.
b. Use marine quality plywood for any application showing plywood in any
exterior woodwork.

C. Melamine-Faced Particleboard: Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2,

finished on both faces with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and
complying with NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for Test Methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.

1. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.

D. High Pressure Laminates: High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as

indicated or if not indicated, as required by quality standard:

1. Color and Texture or Pattern: Shall be as specified in this Section or selected by

Engineer from manufacturer’s full range of colors and patterns.
2. Provide plastic laminate types suitable for post-forming application.
3. Where specified, provide plastic laminates with additional factory-applied shield for
enhanced resistance to enhance scratch and wear resistance.
4. Dimension and Thickness: Provide not less than the following plastic laminate
thickness:

a. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS.

b. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP.
c. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS.

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - Page 6 of 20

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

d. Edges: Grade HGS or PVC tape, 0.460-mm minimum thickness, matching

laminate in color, pattern, and finish as indicated on Drawings or selected by
Engineer.
e. Width: To be selected from manufacturer’s standard widths to match
application.

1) No seams or joints shall be accepted.

E. Plastic-Laminate:

1. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural

Woodwork Standards" for grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated
for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.

a. Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that
woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades
specified.
b. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality
standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard.
Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality
standard.

2. Grade: Premium.
3. Type of Construction: As indicated.
4. Reveal Dimension: As indicated.
5. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:

a. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS.

b. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP.
c. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS.
d. Edges: Grade HGS.
e. Pattern Direction: As indicated.

2.4 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment: Shall be type listed in BS 8417: 2011+A1: 2014 (except coal tar
creosote), obtained from an approved manufacturer, to give suitable protection against ter-
mites and other wood destroying organisms.

B. Use water borne or oil-borne solutions. Use borate-based preservative for indoor
applications and copper-nathenate-based preservative for exterior applications and where
woods may be buried below natural ground grade.

C. Do not use wood treatments containing Creosote, Arsenic or Pentachlorophenol.

D. Preservative treatment for indoor application shall be fully compatible with fire retardant
treatment that shall be applied subsequently.

E. Fire retardant preservative to be applied on internally used borate-based preservatives is to

be also borate-based.

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - Page 7 of 20

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

F. Where a manufacturer’s recommends one product for both preservative and fire retardant
treatments, the recommended product shall be listed by the American Wood Preservatives
Association (AWPA), or other equivalent international organization, as recommended for
both applications as specified in Contract Documents.

G. No preservative treatment shall be applied to hardwoods certified by manufacturer as not

accepting treatments.

2.5 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Provide fire-retardant-treated materials complying with:

1. Requirements in this Article,

2. Fire-test-response characteristics specified in Article “Quality Assurance” in this
Section.

B. Do not use treated materials that do not comply with requirements of referenced
woodworking standard or that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective.

C. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely

affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated
materials.

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S.

Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Use fire retardant materials that are water borne and applied in non-pressure process.

F. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or

less when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive
combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not
extending more than 3.2 m beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Kiln-dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19

and 15 percent, respectively.
2. For items indicated to receive a stained, transparent, or natural finish, use organic
resin chemical formulation.
3. Mill lumber after treatment within limits set for wood removal that do not affect
listed fire-test-response characteristics, using a woodworking shop certified by testing
and inspecting agency.
4. Mill lumber before treatment and implement procedures during treatment and drying
processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from
drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of
treated woodwork.

G. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Made from softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals

mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and
smoke-developed index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84.

1. For panels 19 mm thick and less, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-2 except
for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 11 MPa; modulus of
elasticity, 2070 MPa; internal bond, 550 kPa; and screw-holding capacity on face and
edge, 1100 and 1000 N, respectively.

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - Page 8 of 20

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2. For panels 20 to 32 mm thick, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-1 except for
the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 9 MPa; modulus of elasticity,
1720 MPa; linear expansion, 0.50 percent; and screw-holding capacity on face and
edge, 1100 and 780 N, respectively.

H. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: Medium-density fiberboard (MDF) panels complying with

ANSI A208.2, made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals
mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and
smoke-developed index of 200 or less per ASTM E 84.

2.6 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Types of required hardware and accessories shall be as indicated on Drawings,

Schedules and Manuals and as required for complete and functional installation.

B. Hardware, General: Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings and Schedules, provide

manufacturer's standard Stainless-steel or brass commercial-quality, heavy-duty hardware.

1. Use threaded metal or plastic insertion dowels with machine screws for fastening to
plywood and fiberboard except where hardware is through-bolted from back side.

C. Butt Hinges: 70-mm, five-knuckle steel hinges made from 2.4-mm- thick metal, and as
follows:

1. Semiconcealed Hinges for Flush Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01361.

2. Semiconcealed Hinges for Overlay Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01521.
3. Provide plastic insertion dowels to receive the screws of the hinge and 5 mm
Euroscrews to attach the baseplate.

D. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, self-closing.

E. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.

F. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, of 100 mm long, 8 mm in diameter 127 mm long, or
63.5 mm deep, and 8 mm in diameter.

G. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141.

H. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04102; with shelf brackets,
B04112.

I. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal.

J. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9.

1. Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full-overtravel-extension type;

zinc-plated-steel, ball-bearing slides.
2. For drawers not more than 75 mm high and not more than 600 mm wide, provide
Grade 2.
3. For drawers more than 75 mm high, but not more than 150 mm high and not more
than 600 mm wide, provide Grade 1.
4. For drawers more than 150 mm high or more than 600 mm wide, provide
Grade 1HD-100.
5. For computer keyboard shelves, provide Grade 1.

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - Page 9 of 20

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

6. For trash bins not more than 500 mm high and 400 mm wide, provide Grade 1HD-
100.

K. Slides for Sliding Glass Doors: BHMA A156.9, B07063; aluminum.

L. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.

M. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.

N. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.

O. Tempered Float Glass for Cabinet Doors: ASTM C1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I,
Quality-Q3, 6 mm thick unless otherwise indicated.

1. Tint Color: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Unframed Glass Doors: Seam exposed edges seamed before tempering.

P. Mirror Glass for Cabinet Doors: ASTM C1503, Quality-Q3.

1. Thickness: 6.0 mm.

Q. Tempered Float Glass for Cabinet Shelves: ASTM C1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I,
Class 1 clear, Quality-Q3; with exposed edges seamed before tempering, 6 mm thick.

R. Grommets for Cable Passage: Molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot
for wire passage.

1. Color: Brown.

S. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with
BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated as selected by Engineer and complying
with the following:

1. Dark, Oxidized, Satin Bronze, Oil Rubbed: BHMA 613 for bronze base.
2. Bright Brass, Clear Coated: BHMA 605 for brass base.
3. Bright Brass, Vacuum Coated: BHMA 723 for brass base.
4. Satin Brass, Blackened, Bright Relieved, Clear Coated: BHMA 610 for brass base.
5. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base.
6. Bright Chromium Plated: BHMA 625 for brass or bronze base.
7. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.

T. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product
class requirements in BHMA A156.9.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to
less than 15 percent moisture content.

1. Preservative Treatment: Provide softwood lumber treated by pressure process,

AWPA U1; Use Category UC3b.
2. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - Page 10 of 20

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure
anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside
face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-
steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.

1. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors.

a. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply

with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise
indicated.
b. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy
Group A4 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 738M, and nuts, ASTM F 836M.

C. Provide self-drilling screws for metal-framing supports, as recommended by metal-framing

manufacturer.

D. Adhesives, General: Product recommended by fabricator for each substrate for secure
anchorage and incompliance with requirements specified in Division 6, Section “Rough
Carpentry”.

2.8 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Comply with requirements for highest top quality grade in
referenced quality standard.

B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for
wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in
installation areas.

C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.

D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum

extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary
for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance
for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

1. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled.
Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be
removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check
measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings
before disassembling for shipment.

E. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing

fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or
roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of
cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - Page 11 of 20

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS WOOD JOINERY WORKS

A. Comply with the following:

1. Details and configurations indicated on Drawings.

2. Specifications of related items and materials specified in this Section.
3. Specifications of related items and materials specified in other Specification Sections.

B. General Requirements for Woodwork:

1. Woods shall be machine sanded and dressed to smooth uniform perfect sections.
2. Dimensions of wood sections shall be sufficient to sustain imposed loads and
straining actions with sufficient factor of safety.
3. Components shall be in single pieces. No splicing shall be allowed.
4. Joints shall be glued tongue-and-groove. Length of tongue-and-groove shall be
sufficient to transfer load. Double tongue-and-groove shall be used where possible
for wide sections.
5. Rounds shall be formed from solid wood.
6. Joint line shall be hairline with flush matching wood surfaces at joint sides.
7. Dimensions shall be exact.
8. Drawers and doors shall be fitted, properly aligned and shall operate smoothly under
various atmospheric conditions.
9. All doors, drawers, leg mechanisms, trays, and other operating parts shall be well
fitted, properly aligned, and operate smoothly without loose or sloppy action.
10. Doors shall not rub, rattle, or be warped. Hinges shall operate smoothly and quietly
with no binding or other defect to affect performance.
11. All tops and structural members shall be warp-free.
12. Interior surfaces of compartments and drawers shall be free of dirt, dust, shavings or
any foreign matter before finishing.
13. Edges and backs of drawers shall be finished to be compatible with exterior.
14. Doors shall be free of rattle, squeaking, warp or rubbing. All doors shall be
approximately uniform in clearance. All catches shall be properly aligned and
installed.
15. Drawers shall have free-running action with no binding or sticking. Drawers with side
mounted glides shall operate freely with no squeaking or rattling and be well
lubricated.
16. Drawer guides and runners shall be securely fastened and properly positioned to
assure correct drawer alignment.
17. Route lines, cut outs or grooves shall be smoothly machined and /or sanded. Shapes,
carvings and “U” cuts are to be finished smoothly with no visible unfinished or rough
areas.
18. All hardware (hinges, pulls, latches, catches, glides etc., shall be attached so that they
fit and operate properly and serve their purposes during transit and use.
19. Mitered corners are to be square, flush, tight and well glued.
20. Interior screws shall be flush or countersunk with the surface of the part where they
are used.
21. Use marine quality plywood for any application showing plywood in a wet area
similar to toilets and kitchens.
22. Concealed Frames:

a. Kiln-dried hardwood frames. Use of softwood frames shall not be accepted.

b. Provide corner blocks of same wood and suitable dimensions.
c. Joints are to be glued tongue and groove.
d. Frame is to be firm, stable and of robust construction.

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - Page 12 of 20

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

23. Dimension and Thicknesses: As indicated on Drawings and specified in this Section.

2.10 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Comply with details indicated on Drawings for each wood work item.

B. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Custom.

C. Lumber:

1. Hardwood:

a. Species: As indicated on Drawings or Schedules.

b. Cut: Plain sliced, rift cut or quarter cut, as indicated on Drawings or Schedules.
c. Grain Direction: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Softwood:

a. Species: As indicated on Drawings or Schedules.

b. Cut: Plain sliced.
c. Grain Direction: As indicated on Drawings.

3. Wood Moisture Content: 8 to 13 percent.

4. Provide split species on trim, frames and jambs that face areas with different wood
species, matching each face of woodwork to species and cut of finish wood surfaces
in areas finished.
5. Do not use plain sliced softwood lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 76 mm
wide.

D. Hardware, Accessories and Other Materials:

1. Comply with the following:

a. Details and configurations indicated on Drawings.

b. Specifications of related items and materials specified in this Section.
c. Specifications of related items and materials specified other Specifications
Sections.
d. All stainless steel hardware and accessories shall be manufactured from
stainless steel, alloy 304, of satin finish.

2.11 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK FOR OPAQUE FINISH

A. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Custom.

1. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood.

2. Wood Moisture Content: 8 to 13 percent.

B. Hardware, Accessories and Other Materials:

1. Comply with the following:

a. Details and configurations indicated on Drawings.

b. Specifications of related items and materials specified in this Section.

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - Page 13 of 20

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

c. Specifications of related items and materials specified other Specifications

Sections.
d. All stainless steel hardware and accessories shall be manufactured from
stainless steel, alloy 304, of satin finish.

2.12 AUXILIARY DECORATIVE FINISH MATERIALS

A. Comply with the following:

1. Details and configurations indicated on Drawings.

2. Specifications of related items and materials specified in other Specifications
Sections including but not limited to the following:

a. Division 5 Section "Decorative Formed Metal" for miscellaneous decorative

materials used within architectural woodworks.
b. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for decorative glass panels used within
architectural woodworks.

1) Glass Thickness: As indicated on Drawings for each application but not

less than 6 mm.

c. Division 12 Section "Stone Countertops" for natural stone countertops installed

over architectural woodworks.
d. Division 12 Section "Simulated Stone Countertops" for simulated stone
countertops installed on architectural woodworks.
e. Other related specification sections for materials included on relevant
drawings, details and Finish Schedules.

2.13 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK TYPES

A. Wardrobes, Wood Kitchens, Cabinets, and Similar Woodworks: Comply with requirements
specified in this Section and the following:

1. Construction: As indicated on Drawings, as required by referenced quality standard,

and specified in this Section.
2. Panel Core and Wood Species: As indicated on Drawings and specified in this
Section.

a. Wood Boards: Hardwood veneer-core plywood boards. For wet areas cabinets
and vanity cabinets and shelves use marine quality plywood.
b. Thicknesses: Shall be as indicated on Drawings and as necessary for each
application to provide robust and neat joinery works but not less than 22 mm
where thicknesses are not shown.
c. Facing: Wood veneer or high pressure laminate as indicated in Finish
Schedules.

3. Units shall be pre-fabricated units constructed to dimensions and details indicated on

Drawings.
4. Lipping: Solid wood edges of species to match face veneer species, thickness shall be
not less than 20 mm.
5. Bases: Solid wood bases of species to match face veneer species, thickness shall be
not less than 20 mm, height as indicated.

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - Page 14 of 20

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

6. Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware and accessories selected by

Engineer including but not limited to; sliding door hardware, hinges, drawer slides,
latches, pull handles, and knobs of finish and models to the selection of the Engineer.
7. Kitchen Accessories: Provide kitchen accessories indicated on Drawings fabricated
from stainless steel 304.
8. Blocking wood shall be from approved hardwood type.
9. Units are to be assembled in manufacturer's standard system to provide neat and
robust construction.
10. Exposed Surfaces: As indicated on Drawings and schedules, and specified in this
Section.
11. Drawers:

a. Drawer Fronts: 19-mm veneer-core-type plywood, with finish indicated.

b. Drawer Sides and Backs: 12.7-mm solid-wood or veneer-core hardwood
plywood, with glued dovetail or multiple-dowel joints.
c. Drawer Bottoms: 6.4-mm thermoset decorative panels or veneer faces as
indicated, glued and dadoed into front, back, and sides of drawers. Use 12.7-
mm material for drawers more than 600 mm wide.

12. Provide lighting fixtures indicated with all necessary provisions, conduits for electric
wiring complying with relevant Electric Specifications requirements.
13. Other Requirements: As specified in this Section and indicated on Drawings.

B. Wood Counters and Workstations: Comply with requirements specified in this Section and
the following:

1. All work stations and counters shall be factory assembled, finished and delivered to
site complete and ready for installation.
2. Counters shall be constructed from 22 mm thick hardwood veneer-core plywood
boards factory-finished on exposed surface with veneer or high pressure laminate as
indicated in Finish Schedules, fixed from back to a framing constructed from
preservative treated reddish pine wood. Edges of counters shall be treated with solid
wood edging formed to Details indicated on Drawings.
3. Counters semi exposed supports shall be fabricated from structural steel angles and
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication as specified in Division 5, Section “Metal
Fabrications”.
4. All exposed or semi-exposed moldings, edgings, beads, trims shall be formed from
solid wood. Type of wood shall be same type of wood veneer used in the counter.
5. Comply with constructions and configurations indicated on Drawings, as required by
referenced quality standard, and specified in this Section.
6. Shall be built-in units constructed to dimensions, materials and details indicated on
Drawings.
7. Wood framing, furring, blocking or other rough carpentry work shall be constructed
from preservative treated reddish Pine Wood.
8. Units are to be assembled in manufacturer's standard system to provide neat and
robust construction.
9. Provide lighting fixtures and electric outlets indicated with all necessary provisions,
conduits for electric wiring complying with relevant Electric Specifications
requirements.
10. Countertop, Counter Cladding and Skirting Finish: As indicated on Drawings for
each type of counter and specified in relevant specification sections including but not
limited to the following:

a. Division 5 Section "Decorative Formed Metal" for miscellaneous decorative

materials used within architectural woodworks.

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - Page 15 of 20

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

b. Division 12 Section "Stone Countertops" for natural stone countertops installed

over architectural woodworks.
c. Division 12 Section "Simulated Stone Countertops" for engineered stone
countertops installed on architectural woodworks.

11. Other Requirements: As specified in this Section and indicated on Drawings.

C. Hardwood Veneer-Faced Cladding Panels: Comply with requirements specified in this

Section and the following:

1. Face Veneer:

a. Species: As indicated on Drawings or Schedules.

b. Cut: Plain sliced, rift cut, quarter cut, half-round cut or rotary cut, as indicated
on Drawings or Schedules.

2. Concealed Backing Veneer Species: Any hardwood compatible with face species.
3. Wood Moisture Content: 8 to 13 percent.
4. Veneer Matching Method: As indicated on Drawings or Schedules.
5. Grain Direction: As indicated on Drawings.
6. Panel-Matching Method:

a. As agreed on mockup, to provide uniformity of grain and color.

7. Panel Core Construction: Hardwood veneer-core plywood, or MDF.

a. Thickness: 22 mm, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

8. Exposed Panel Edges: Inset solid-wood concealed with veneer on face and back,
unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
9. Comply with constructions and configurations indicated on Drawings, as required by
referenced quality standard, and specified in this Section.
10. Wood framing, furring, blocking or other rough carpentry work shall be constructed
from preservative treated reddish Pine Wood.

D. MDF Wall Paneling:

1. Where indicated, Moisture-resistant, Carved, Patterned, Plain MDF panels or strips;

Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde complying with ANSI
A208.2
2. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings and as necessary for each application to provide
robust and neat joinery works but not less than 18 mm where thicknesses are not
shown.
3. Pattern: As shown on drawings.
4. Fixing: Fixing from wall sides and floor as per manufacturer standard Free from the
Top.
5. Finish: High gloss paint or as indicated.

E. Decorative Wood Shelving Units: Comply with requirements specified in this Section and
the following:

1. Construction and Configuration: As indicated on Drawings for different shelving

units indicated, as required by referenced quality standard, but not less than the
following:

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - Page 16 of 20

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

a. Panel Core and Wood Species: Hardwood veneer-core plywood boards.

b. Thicknesses: Shall be as indicated on Drawings and as necessary for each
application to provide robust and neat joinery works but not less than 22 mm
where thicknesses are not shown.
c. Facing: Wood veneer or high pressure laminate as indicated in Finish
Schedules.
d. Lipping: Solid wood edges of species to match face veneer species, thickness
shall be not less than 20 mm.
e. Metal Frames: Hollow metal stainless steel frames or as shown on Drawings.
Refer to Section “Decorative Formed Metal” for metal requirements and
specifications.
f. Comply with constructions and configurations indicated on Drawings, as
required by referenced quality standard, and specified in this Section.
g. Shall be built-in units constructed to dimensions, materials and details
indicated on Drawings.
h. Wood framing, furring, blocking or other rough carpentry work shall be
constructed from preservative treated reddish Pine Wood.
i. Units are to be assembled in manufacturer's standard system to provide neat
and robust construction.
j. Fixation: Provide all necessary shelving supports and accessories for complete
and functional installations.

2. Other Requirements: As specified in this Section and indicated on Drawings.

F. Wood Skirting: Comply with requirements specified in this Section and the following:

1. Construction: As indicated on Drawings, as required by referenced quality standard,

and specified in this Section.
2. Construct from solid wood to details, profiles and dimensions indicated on Drawings
and approved shop drawings:

a. Finished thickness shall not be less than 19 mm.

b. Species: As shown on Drawings and Finish Schedules.
c. Fabrication: All components are to be machine formed, sanded and rebated.
Provide back rebated channel for mounting on hanging sockets.
d. Splices: Furnish components in integral lengths (single pieces) to maximum
extent possible. Are to be hairline.
e. External and internal corners are to be mitered at 45 degrees.

3. Other Requirements: As specified in this Section and indicated on Drawings.

G. Standing and Running Trim: Comply with requirements specified in this Section and the
following:

1. Construction: As indicated on Drawings, as required by referenced quality standard,

and specified in this Section.
2. Panel Core and Wood Species: As indicated on Drawings and specified in this
Section.
3. Wood Species and Cut: Match species and cut indicated for transparent-finished
architectural woodwork located in same area of building, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation
require field assembly.
5. Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in plant and
prepare for field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together.
6. Other Requirements: As specified in this Section and indicated on Drawings.

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - Page 17 of 20

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

H. Ornamental and Miscellaneous Woodworks: Comply with requirements specified in this

Section and the following:

1. Construction: As indicated on Drawings, as required by referenced quality standard,

and specified in this Section.
2. Panel Core and Wood Species: As indicated on Drawings and specified in this
Section.
3. Solid Wood Species: As indicated on Drawings and Finish Schedules.
4. Comply with profiles and ornamentations indicated on Drawings.
5. Other Requirements: As specified in this Section and indicated on Drawings.

I. Shoe Racks: Comply with requirements specified in this Section and the following:

1. Panel Core and Wood Species: MDF boards.

2. Thicknesses: Shall be as indicated on Drawings and as necessary for each application
to provide robust and neat joinery works but not less than 18 mm where thicknesses
are not shown.
3. Facing: High pressure laminate as indicated on Finish Schedules.
4. Solid Wood Species: Match wood veneer species.
5. Comply with profiles and ornamentations indicated on Drawings.
6. Other Requirements: As specified in this Section and indicated on Drawings.

J. Book Shelves: Comply with requirements specified in this Section and the following:

1. Panel Core and Wood Species: MDF boards.

2. Thicknesses: Shall be as indicated on Drawings and as necessary for each application
to provide robust and neat joinery works but not less than 18 mm where thicknesses
are not shown.
3. Facing: High pressure laminate as indicated on Finish Schedules.
4. Solid Wood Species: Match wood veneer species.
5. Comply with profiles and ornamentations indicated on Drawings.
6. Other Requirements: As specified in this Section and indicated on Drawings.

K. Mihrab: Comply with requirements specified in this Section and the following:

1. Panel Core and Wood Species: MDF boards.

2. Thicknesses: Shall be as indicated on Drawings and as necessary for each application
to provide robust and neat joinery works but not less than 18 mm where thicknesses
are not shown.
3. Facing: As indicated on Drawings and Finish Schedules.
4. Stainless steel Facing: Comply with Division 5 Section "Decorative Formed Metal".
5. Solid Wood Species: Match wood veneer species.
6. Comply with profiles and ornamentations indicated on Drawings.
7. Other Requirements: As specified in this Section and indicated on Drawings.

L. Finishes of wood Works:

1. Comply with finish types indicated in Finish Schedules and other related documents.
2. Comply with finishes specified hereafter in the Section.

2.14 SHOP FINISHING

A. General: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section.

Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - Page 18 of 20

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

B. Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished.

C. Shop Priming: Shop apply the prime coat including backpriming, if any, for items specified
to be field finished.

D. Transparent Finishes: As per Division 9 Section "Staining and Transparent Finishing".

E. Opaque Finishes: As per Division 9 Section "Interior Painting".

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in

installation areas.

B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

3.2 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT APPLICATION

A. Same as specified in Division 6, Section “Rough Carpentry”.

3.3 FIRE TREATMENT APPLICATION

A. Wood materials used in interior Architectural woodworks shall be fire retardant treated as
specified. Engineered wood products are to be fire-retardant-treated types in factory.

B. Application of fire retardant treatment is to be accomplished by a certified applicator ap-

proved by Engineer.

C. Application is to be carried out after cutting and machining, but before assembly, by a pro-
cessor licensed by the treatment solution manufacturer.

D. Apply in the rates and number of coats recommended by manufacturer. Allow sufficient
timing for full drying between successive coats.

E. After treatment, allow wood to dry before use.

F. For each batch of wood, provide certificate of assurance from the approved applicator that
treatment has been carried out as specified.

G. Re-treat all treated wood which is sawn along the length, made thick, planed or otherwise
extensively processed.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2
for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - Page 19 of 20

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements
for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.

C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.
Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 3 mm in 2400 mm.

D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged
finish at cuts.

E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure

with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete
installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk
and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.

F. Installation of Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings
properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in
openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and
accessory items as indicated.

1. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not
completed in the shop
2. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed
shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 3 mm in 2400 mm.
3. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair
damaged finish at cuts
4. Install cabinets with no more than 3 mm in 2400-mm sag, bow, or other variation
from a straight line.
5. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than
400 mm o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 38-mm
penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.

3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform
appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to

restore damaged or soiled areas.

END OF SECTION 064023

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - Page 20 of 20

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

SECTION 066200 - CAST PLASTIC (GRP) FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. GRP Ladders.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit in compliance with Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures.”

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1. Comply with Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, thicknesses, required clearances, tolerances, materials,

colors, finishes, fabrication details, field jointing, adjacent construction, design load
parameters, methods of support.

D. Installer Certificates: Signed by product manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved,

authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install his products.

E. Installer Experience: List of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out
successfully by the installer with the same product endorsed by the manufacturer’s
representative.

F. Samples: For the specified products, in manufacturer's standard sizes, showing the full
range of texture and pattern variations expected. Prepare Samples from the same material to
be used for the Work.

G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation of opening required, rough-in

sizes; provide templates for cast-in or placed frames or anchors; tolerances for item
placement, temporary bracing of components.

H. Qualification Data:

1. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with
project name, addresses, names of Engineer and Employers, and other information
specified.

CAST PLASTIC (GRP) FABRICATIONS 066200 - Page 1 of 5

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2. For Testing Agency Qualifications include proof of qualifications in the form of a

recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

1.4 LOCAL REGULATIONS AND CODES

A. Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, and regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.

1. Obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Comply with Egyptian Codes and Standards requirements and latest circulars.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Comply with Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements.”

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide cast plastic fabrications with the following

surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84
by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Engineer:

1. Flame Spread: 25 or less.

2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.

C. Mockups: Before installing cast plastic fabrications, build mockups for each form of
construction required to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate
qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following
requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed
by Engineer.
2. Build mockup of typical area as shown on Drawings.
3. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
5. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting cast plastic fabrications
construction.
6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
7. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.

D. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Work specified in this Section is to be executed only by an

established manufacturer, specialised in the manufacture of architectural GRP components
and assemblies for at least five (5) years, and who possesses adequate plant, equipment,
skilled tradesmen and who is known to have executed satisfactorily the manufacture and
installation of projects similar in scope and nature.

E. Installer’s Qualifications: A qualified firm specializing in performing the work of this

Section with minimum three years documented experience and that is approved, authorized,
or licensed by the product manufacturer to install his product and that is eligible to receive
manufacturer's warranty. Include project names and addresses, names and addresses of
Engineers and Employers, and other information specified.

CAST PLASTIC (GRP) FABRICATIONS 066200 - Page 2 of 5

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An accredited, independent agency with the experience and
capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E329; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to
authorities.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Where cast plastic fabrications is indicated to fit to other construction,
verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and
indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Comply with Division 01 Section "Warranties".

B. Special Warranty: Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and
Contractor are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace without
limitations cast plastic fabrications that does not comply with requirements or that fails
within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, cracking,
deforming, discoloration, fading, moisture penetration or otherwise deteriorating beyond
normal weathering.

1. Fading is defined as loss of color, after cleaning with product recommended by

manufacturer, of more than 5 Hunter color-difference units as measured according to
ASTM D 2244.
2. Warping, distortion or twist, if installed in controlled environment or stored in similar
environment

C. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

D. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Employer may
have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:

1. Fibrex.
2. El Banaaon Construction - El Shebokshy & Co.
3. Mina Country.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Resin: Fire retardant polyester type brominated reactor blended resin. Up to 30% antimony
trioxide permitted.

CAST PLASTIC (GRP) FABRICATIONS 066200 - Page 3 of 5

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

B. Gel Coat: Polyester neo pentyl glycol type, to obtain optimum processing and service
qualities in the finished product. Formulated to be non-fading, non- chalking, ultraviolet
stabilized and scratch resistant. Capable of being applied in required thicknesses. Matte,
non-glare, textured finish and color by addition of specially formulated aggregates selected
by Engineer from manufacturers’ standard range.

C. Fasteners: Corrosion resistant, sized to resist applied loads.

2.3 FINISH

A. Finished surfaces to be smooth, free from all defects.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Embedded or Inserted Hardware: Noncombustible, noncorrosive, units that are integrated

into cast plastic fabrications and are not visible on the finish face.

B. Fastening Adhesive: Comply with plastic fabrications manufacturer's written

recommendations.

C. Joint and Fastener Hole Patch: Comply with plastic fabrications manufacturer's written
recommendations.

2.5 STAINLESS STEEL FITTINGS, FASTENERS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Stainless steel shall be quality AISI 316.

B. Fasteners: Shall be stainless steel bolts, of suitable diameter and length to resist loads
applied to fastened elements as per the structural calculations submitted under Division 5
Section “Metal Fabrications”.

2.6 COMPONENTS

A. GRP Ladders: Fiberglass-composite ladders or railings made of pultruded tubing with

internal reinforcement, where needed, to support a point load of 150 kg at middle of rung.
Rungs are to be coated with abrassive material for slip resistance. Safety cages are also
made from fiberglass-composite materials. Ladders shall comply with OSHA PP 1910.27
and installed to supplier's specifications. Products shall be designed with a 3 to 1 safety
factor. Spacings and dimensions shall be as indicated on Drawings.

1. Construction: Fiberglass content min. 60 % glass content by weight.

2. Tensile Strength: ASTM D 638 30,000 psi 206 MPa
3. Tensile Modulus: ASTM D 638 2,500,000 psi 17236 MPa
4. Flexural Strength: ASTM D 790 30,000 psi 206 MPa
5. Flexural Modulus: ASTM D 790 1,800,000 psi 12410 MPa
6. Short Beam Shear: ASTM D 2344M 4,500 psi 31 MPa
7. Shear Modulus-Transverse: 450,000 psi
8. Thermal Expansion Coef. ASTM D 696 .000008 in/in/F
9. Flame Spread: ASTM E 84 25 or less

CAST PLASTIC (GRP) FABRICATIONS 066200 - Page 4 of 5

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Install cast plastic fabrications true in line and plane. Use concealed shims where required
for alignment.

C. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum
lengths available. Stagger joints in adjacent and parallel or related standing and running
trim. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface
contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints.

D. Attach cast plastic fabrications at joints with adhesive and band or brace together until
adhesive is cured. Cure adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Predrill fastener holes in plastic ornamentation.

F. Locate fasteners not less than 100 mm o.c. and not less than 8 mm from edge and end.

G. Patch fastener holes flush with finish face. Sand patch smooth and level.

END OF SECTION 066200

CAST PLASTIC (GRP) FABRICATIONS 066200 - Page 5 of 5

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

SECTION 067300 - COMPOSITE DECKING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Composite Decking around outdoor swimming pool mounted on adjustable Injection

molded pedestals.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section "Product Requirements” regarding submittals and substitutions

of products.
2. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry” regarding Timber Joists.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM D-7032-04: Standard Specification for Establishing Performance Ratings for Wood-
Plastic Composite Deck Boards and Guardrail Systems (Guards or Handrails), ASTM
International.

B. ASTM D-7031-04: Standard Guide for Evaluating Mechanical and Physical Properties of
Wood-Plastic Composite Products, ASTM International.

C. ASTM E-84-01: Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials,
ASTM International

D. ASTM D 570: Water Absorption of Plastics

E. ASTM D 1761: Mechanical Fasteners in Wood

F. ASTM D -1413-99: Test method for Wood Preservatives by Laboratory Soil-block

Cultures.

G. ASTM C177: Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance:

1. Deck: Uniform Load – 100l bf/sq.ft.

COMPOSITE DECKING 067300 - Page 1 of 4

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-LS-01 REV 0
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2. Tread of Stairs: Concentrated Load: 750 lf/sq.ft., and 1/8” max. Deflection with a
concentrated load of 300 lbf on area of 4 sq. in.

B. Fire-Test Response Characteristics per ASTM E-84.

C. Seismic loads as per UBC 1997 and based on Dubai Municipality regulations: Zone 2B.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Indicate sizes, profiles, surface style, and performance characteristics.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples: For each product specified, one sample representing actual product color, size, and
finish.

1. One composite wood unit.

2. One Injection molded pedestal

D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

E. Maintenance Data: For composite wood to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Local Regulations and Codes: Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, and
regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Comply with UAE Fire & Life Safety Code of Practice including Annexures.
3. Comply with Dubai Civil Defense and Dubai Municipality requirements and
circulars.

B. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain composite wood decking from single source from single
manufacturer.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver composite wood decking crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site
storage. Use vented plastic.

B. Store products on a flat and level surface. Adjust support blocks accordingly.

C. Keep material covered using the provided bundle cover until time of installation

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with composite

wood decking by field measurements.

COMPOSITE DECKING 067300 - Page 2 of 4

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-LS-01 REV 0
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Provide complete system manufactures warranty against rot, decay,
splitting, checking, splintering, fungal damage, and termite damage for a period of 10 years
from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Wood-Plastic Composite Lumber:

1. Composite Decking consisting of recycled Linear Low Density Polyethylene

(LLDPE) and recycled wood. The product is extruded into shapes and sizes as
follows:
a. Decking Boards: 1900 x 140 x 25mm
b. Composition: 60% Hardwood, 35% Plastic and 5% Adhesive.
c. Color/ Finish: brown shade, as selected by the Engineer from manufacturer full
range of colors and finish.
2. Physical properties:

B. Pedestal System:

1. Injection molded pedestals with screwjack mechanism and integrated spacing tabs.

C. Accessories:

1. Fasteners: Manufacturer recommended fasteners.

COMPOSITE DECKING 067300 - Page 3 of 4

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-LS-01 REV 0
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine floors for suitable conditions where composite wood decking will be installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install composite wood decking according to manufacturer’s installation guidelines.

B. Cut, drill, and rout using carbide tipped blades.

C. Do not use composite wood material for structural applications

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Following cleaning recommendations as found in manufacturer installation guide.

END OF SECTION 067300

COMPOSITE DECKING 067300 - Page 4 of 4

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-LS-01 REV 0
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

SECTION 071113 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. All tests listed in this document according to ASTM Standards are also accepted to be
conducted using equivalent BS/BS EN Standards or Egyptian Code of Practice ECP.

B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes cold-applied, emulsified asphalt damp-proofing applied to the

following concrete surfaces in contact with the well compacted fill:

1. Back side of concrete retaining walls located above the bottom of the slab on grade
level or as specified in design drawings,

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include recommendations for method of
application, primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness, and protection course.

B. Material Certificates: For each product, signed by manufacturers.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers through one
source from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by
manufacturer of primary materials and as per the Employer’s Representative’s approval.

1.5 PROJECTCONDITIONS

A. Substrate: Proceed with damp-proofing only after substrate constructions curing and
penetrating works have been completed

B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit asphalt dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers'
written instructions.

C. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application of dampproofing in enclosed

spaces. Maintain ventilation until dampproofing has thoroughly cured.

BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 071113 - Page 1 of 3

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ST-01 REV 0
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

A. Cold-Applied, Emulsified-Asphalt Dampproofing:

1. One of the following at Contractor's option:

a. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.

b. Fibered Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.
c. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water as
recommended by manufacturer.

B. Asphalt-Coated, Woven Glass Fabric: ASTM D 1668, Type I.

C. Protection Course, Roll-Roofing Type: Smooth-surfaced roll roofing complying with

ASTM D 6380, Type II.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for surface smoothness and other
conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Begin dampproofing application only after substrate construction and penetrating

work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from
being stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from
entering and clogging weep holes and drains.

B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal joints,
and apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by prime material manufacturer.

3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements

are indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of
dampproofing.

1. Apply additional coats if recommended by manufacturer or required to achieve

coverages indicated.
2. Allow each coat of dampproofing to cure 24 hours before applying subsequent coats.

BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 071113 - Page 2 of 3

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ST-01 REV 0
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

B. Apply dampproofing to all concrete surfaces specified in section 1.2 in contact with soil .
1. Install flashings and corner protection stripping at internal and external corners,
changes in plane, construction joints, cracks, and where indicated as "reinforced," by
embedding an 200-mm wide strip of asphalt-coated glass fabric in a heavy coat of
dampproofing. Dampproofing coat required for embedding fabric is in addition to
other coats required.

C. Provide cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt dampproofing, as specified in subsequent articles

for substrates indicated, within the following limitations:
1. Use cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt dampproofing on surfaces indicated on the
drawings to receive dampproofing.

3.4 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING

A. For all concrete surfaces specified in section 1.2: Apply two brush or spray coats at not less
than 0.6 L/sq. m for first coat and 0.4 L/sq. m for second coat, one fibered brush or spray
coat at not less than 1.2 L/sq. m, or one trowel coat at not less than 1.6 L/sq. m.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION COURSE

A. Where indicated, install protection course over completed-and-cured dampproofing.

Comply with dampproofing material manufacturer's written recommendations for attaching
protection course. Support protection course with spot application of trowel-grade mastic
where not otherwise indicated.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Remove dampproofing materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing.

END OF SECTION 071113

BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 071113 - Page 3 of 3

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ST-01 REV 0
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

SECTION 071355 - APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. All tests listed in this document according to ASTM Standards are also accepted to be
conducted using equivalent BS/BS EN Standards or Egyptian Code of Practice ECP.

B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Single-ply, modified bituminous sheet waterproofing.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete curing and finishing.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review waterproofing requirements including surface preparation, substrate

condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions,
special details and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection
procedures, and protection and repairs.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Submit detailed method statement along with Inspection Test Procedures

2. Include construction details, material descriptions, and tested physical and
performance properties of waterproofing.
3. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating
substrate.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5: For products and materials required to comply
with requirements for regional materials, certificates indicating location of material
manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material.
Include statement indicating distance to Project, cost for each regional material, and
fraction by weight that is considered regional.

APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING 071355 - Page 1 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ST-01 REV 0
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

C. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing and details of substrate joints
and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining
waterproofing, and other termination conditions.

D. Include layout drawings showing locations of sub membrane containment strips Samples:
For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, including the following
products:

1. 300-by-300-mm square of waterproofing and flashing sheet.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Quality data: Installer Certificate Signed by sheet waterproofing manufacturer certifying

that Installer complies with specified requirements.

B. Field quality Control report: Product Test Reports from a qualified independent testing
agency acceptable to Engineer, indicating and interpreting test results of waterproofing for
compliance with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current waterproofing
formulations.

C. Sample Warranty: Before starting waterproofing, copy of waterproofing manufacturer's and

Installer's warranty, stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who is authorized, approved, or licensed by

sheet waterproofing manufacturer to install manufacturer's products; and who is eligible to
receive waterproofing warranty specified.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials through one source from a single
manufacturer.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to set
quality standards for installation.

1. Build for each typical waterproofing installation including accessories to demonstrate

surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, corner treatment, and protection.

a. Size: 9.3 sq. m in area.

b. Description: Each type of installation.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Engineer specifically approves such
deviations in writing.
3. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockup will be
constructed.
4. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockup before starting sheet waterproofing.
5. If Engineer determines mockup does not comply with requirements, reapply
waterproofing until mockup is approved.
6. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING 071355 - Page 2 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ST-01 REV 0
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within range of ambient and substrate

temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to
a damp or wet substrate.

1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog, or mist.

B. Maintain adequate ventilation during preparation and application of waterproofing

materials.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are
jointly and severally liable and agree to repair or replace all defective components of the
warranted item. Warranty shall include both, materials and workmanship. All parties are
also agreeing to replace waterproofing material that does not comply with requirements or
that does not remain watertight within specified warranty period. Warranty includes
responsibility for removing and replacing construction and other work that conceals
modified bituminous sheet waterproofing

B. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion of the Project.

C. Warranty shall include:

• Defective materials and installation.

• Failure to comply with requirements stated in technical specifications.
• Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
• Faulty operation of movable parts such as hardware.
• Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering and use.
• Delamination of exterior or interior facing materials.
• Making good and installation and finishing all items that are disturbed and that
may be required due to repair or replacement of defective items. Coordinate with
Employer, manufacturer, and installer of adjacent disturbed items to ensure that
their warranty is not cancelled due to the repair work.
• Warranty includes removing and reinstalling protection board, drainage panels,
insulation, pedestals, and pavers on plaza decks.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Source Limitations for Waterproofing System: Obtain waterproofing materials and from
single source from single manufacturer.

APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING 071355 - Page 3 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ST-01 REV 0
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2.2 APP-BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING

A. APP-Modified Bituminous Sheet:4mm minimum thick , prefabricated , modified

bituminous sheet consisting of Attactic-Polypropylene for greater elasticity and flexibility,
smooth surfaced, reinforced with spun bonded non-woven polyester mat for increased
strength, toughness and dimensional stability, complying with ASTM D 6222/D6222M,
Grade S, Type I, , suitable for application indicated.

1. Use: Single-ply, modified bituminous sheet waterproofing for all concrete surfaces in
contact with soil as specified in the design drawings. For back side of retaining walls,
apply the single-ply, modified bituminous sheet waterproofing up to 200 mm above
the slab on grade level or as specified in the design drawings whichever is higher.

B. Physical Properties: Provide APP-modified bituminous sheet materials with the following
properties measured according to ASTM D5147/D5147MStandard tests:

1. Thickness: 4 mm minimum
2. Tensile Strength, @ 23+2ºC: 8.80 KN/m longitudinal; 8.80 KN/m transverse
according to ASTM D5147/D5147M
3. Elongation at @ 23+2ºC: 23 % (longitudinal), 23% (transverse) according to ASTM
D5147/D5147M.
4. Tear Strength: 311 N according to ATSM D 5147/D5147M.
5. Low-Temperature Flexibility, ºC: 0 according to ASTM D5147/D5147M.
6. Water Absorption, % Wt @ 23 ºC 24hrs: <1 according to ASTM D 5147/D5147M
7. Water vapour transmission, g/m2/24hrs: <0.5 according to ASTM E96 procedure E.
8. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 10 m minimum; ASTM D 5385

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for

intended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing.

B. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41.

C. Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type III or Type IV, as recommended by sheet waterproofing
manufacturer.

1. Label each container or provide certification with each load of bulk asphalt
identifying type of asphalt and indicating softening point, minimum flash point,
equiviscous temperature, and finished blowing temperature.

D. Cants and Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide cants and miscellaneous accessories

recommended by sheet waterproofing manufacturer for intended use.

E. Waterproofing and Sheet Flashing Accessories: Provide sealants, pourable sealers, cone
and vent flashings, inside and outside corner flashings, termination reglets and bars, and
other accessories recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use.

F. Protection Course: The following or, at Contractor's option, alternative means of protection
as recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use, and acceptable to
Engineer.

1. Plastic Panel Type: Semi-rigid, extruded or molded, non-biodegradable plastic

panels with a cellular drainage core; overall thickness not less than 4 mm.

APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING 071355 - Page 4 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ST-01 REV 0
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

a. Puncture Resistance: 1000 N minimum; ASTM E 154.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, for compliance with requirements and other
conditions affecting performance.

1. Do not proceed with installation until after the minimum concrete curing period
recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture
by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
3. Notify Engineer in writing of anticipated problems using waterproofing over
substrate.
4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide
clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application.

B. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other
penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.

C. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets,
holes, and other voids.

D. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrate. Remove dust and dirt from
joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.

E. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray
affecting other construction.

F. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations
through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to manufacturer's written
instructions.

G. Install and secure cants, reinforcement strips, flashings and miscellaneous accessories to
comply with manufacturer's written instructions and requirements for treatments at
construction joints, horizontal to vertical surface intersections, inside and outside corners,
perimeters, and edges.

3.3 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET INSTALLATION

A. Install modified bituminous sheet over areas to receive waterproofing, according to

manufacturer's written instructions and applicable recommendations.

1. Unroll sheet and allow to relax for the minimum time period required by
manufacturer.

APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING 071355 - Page 5 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ST-01 REV 0
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

B. Single-Ply, Modified Bituminous Membrane: Install a single ply of modified bituminous

sheet waterproofing.

1. Application: Torch apply to substrate.

C. Horizontal Application: Apply sheets from low point to high point to ensure that side laps
shed water

D. Laps: Accurately align sheets, without stretching, and maintain uniform side and end laps
of minimum dimensions required. Stagger end laps. Heat-weld side and end laps and
completely seal by rolling, leaving no voids.

1. Repair tears and voids in laps and lapped seams not completely sealed.

E. Repair tears and voids in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Slit and flatten
fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing extending 150 mm beyond repaired
areas in all directions.

F. Correct deficiencies to satisfaction of Engineer, or remove sheet waterproofing that does not
comply with requirements, repair and prepare substrates, re-apply waterproofing and repair
flashings.

3.4 PROTECTION COURSE INSTALLATION

A. Install protection course over waterproofing membrane according to manufacturer's written

instructions and before beginning subsequent construction operations. Minimize exposure
of membrane.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Engage a site qualified representative by waterproofing membrane manufacturer to inspect

substrate conditions, surface preparation; membrane application, flashings, protection, and
drainage components, and to furnish daily reports to Engineer.

B. Flood Testing: Flood test each deck area for leaks, according to ASTM D 5957, after
completing waterproofing but before overlying construction is placed. Install temporary
containment assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with potable water.

1. Flood to an average depth of 65 mm with a minimum depth of 25 mm and not

exceeding a depth of 100 mm. Maintain 50 mm of clearance from top of sheet
flashings.
2. Flood each area for 48 hours.
3. After flood testing, repair leaks, repeat flood tests, and make further repairs until
waterproofing installation is watertight.

C. Engage an independent testing agency acceptable to Engineer, to observe flood testing and
examine underside of decks and terminations for evidence of leaks during flood testing.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING 071355 - Page 6 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ST-01 REV 0
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

3.6 PROTECTION, REPAIR, AND CLEANING

A. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected horizontal membrane.

B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

C. Protect installed waterproofing and protection course from damage due to ultraviolet light,
harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings
where installation may be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by
permanent construction immediately after installation.

D. Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with requirements;
repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.

E. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

END OF SECTION 071355

APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING 071355 - Page 7 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ST-01 REV 0
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

SECTION 071614 - POLYMER MODIFIED CEMENT WATERPROOFING - ARCHITECTURAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes polymer-modified cement waterproofing on concrete and masonry surfaces

for the following applications:

1. Façade waterproofing behind cladding and curtain walls spandrels.

2. Wet areas such as toilets, balconies, trenches, mechanical rooms and similar
applications.
3. Swimming pools, Spa, Fountains and similar applications.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for the finishing of concrete walls and slabs
to receive waterproofing.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit in compliance with Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures.”

B. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Comply with Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

2. Include construction details, material descriptions, and installation instructions.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed product.

1. Include Samples of available color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of waterproofing indicated, in manufacturer's

standard sizes.

POLYMER MODIFIED CEMENT WATERPROOFING - ARCHITECTURAL 071614 - Page 1 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data:

1. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with
project name, addresses, names of Engineer and Employers, and other information
specified.
2. For Testing Agency Qualifications include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of waterproofing, patching, and plugging material.

C. Product Test Reports: For each product formulation, for tests performed by manufacturer and
witnessed by a qualified testing agency. Test report shall include manufacturer name and
contacts in addition to tested product name and detailed description.

D. Field quality-control reports.

1.6 LOCAL REGULATIONS AND CODES

A. Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, and regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.

1. Obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Comply with Egyptian Codes and Standards requirements and latest circulars.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Comply with Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements.”

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems

similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As
applicable, procure products from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements,
warranty requirements, and technical or factory-authorized service representative
requirements. Experience: Minimum of 10 years.

C. Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in applying polymer-modified cement

waterproofing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose
work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance, and that
employs workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An accredited, independent agency with the experience and
capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where
required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate
aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup of typical vertical and horizontal surfaces 9 sq. m in size.

POLYMER MODIFIED CEMENT WATERPROOFING - ARCHITECTURAL 071614 - Page 2 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Engineer specifically approves such
deviations in writing.
3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with application only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit polymer-modified cement waterproofing to be performed according to
manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Proceed with waterproofing work only after pipe sleeves, vents, curbs, inserts, drains, and
other projections through the substrate to be waterproofed have been completed. Proceed only
after substrate defects, including honeycombs, voids, and cracks, have been repaired to
provide a sound substrate free of forming materials, including reveal inserts.

C. Ambient Conditions: Proceed with waterproofing work only if temperature is maintained at

4.4 deg C or above during work and cure period, and space is well ventilated and kept free of
water.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Comply with Division 01 Section "Warranties".

B. General Warranty: Any special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Employer of other rights Employer may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the
Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents.

C. Special Warranty: Written complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and
Contractor are jointly and severally agreeing to repair or replace waterproofing that does not
comply with requirements or that fails to perform as required, and to maintain watertight
conditions within specified warranty period. Warranty includes responsibility for removing
and replacing other work that conceals modified cement waterproofing. During warranty
period, repairs and replacements required because of unusual weather phenomena and other
events beyond the Contractor's or the Applicator's control shall be completed by the
Contractor or the Applicator and paid for by the Employer at prevailing rates.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver liquid materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken, labeled with
manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, shelf life, and
directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location
and within the temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer.

C. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.

POLYMER MODIFIED CEMENT WATERPROOFING - ARCHITECTURAL 071614 - Page 3 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

D. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Sika.
2. BASF.
3. Mapei.

2.2 PREPACKAGED, POLYMER-MODIFIED CEMENT WATERPROOFING

A. Positive-Side, Polymer-Modified Cement Waterproofing: Manufacturer's proprietary blend

of dry cementitious and other ingredients for mixing with water or polymer admixture to
produce a waterproof coating that is suitable for vertical and horizontal applications below or
above grade, is breathable, resists positive-side hydrostatic pressure, and has properties
complying with or exceeding the criteria specified below.

1. Water Permeability: Zero.

2. Compressive Strength: Minimum 27.6 MPa at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
3. Flexural Strength: Minimum 6 MPa at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 348.
4. Bond Strength: Minimum 2 MPa at 14 days when tested according to ASTM C 321.
5. Color: As selected by Engineer from full range.
6. Crack Bridging for Facade Applications: Min 0.15 mm.
7. Crack Bridging for Horizontal Applications with their Extended Vertical Surfaces: Min
120%.

2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Patching Compound: Factory-premixed cementitious repair mortar, crack filler, or sealant

recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for filling and patching tie holes, honeycombs,
reveals, and other imperfections and compatible with substrate and other materials indicated.

B. Plugging Compound: Factory-premixed cementitious compound with hydrophobic properties

and recommended by waterproofing manufacturer; resistant to water and moisture but vapor
permeable for all standard applications (vertical, overhead, and horizontal surfaces not
exposed to vehicular traffic); and compatible with substrate and other materials indicated.

C. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I.

D. Slurry-Coat Sand: ASTM C 144.

E. Trowel-Coat Sand: ASTM C 33/C 33M, fine aggregate.

F. Water: Potable.

G. HPDE: Polyethylene sheeting, ASTM D 4397 0.15 mm thick.

POLYMER MODIFIED CEMENT WATERPROOFING - ARCHITECTURAL 071614 - Page 4 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2.4 MIXES

A. Prepackaged, Polymer-Modified Cement Waterproofing: Add prepackaged dry ingredients to

mixing liquid according to manufacturer's written instructions. Mix together with mechanical
mixer or by hand to required consistency.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for suitable conditions
where waterproofing is to be applied.

B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

C. Notify Engineer in writing of active leaks or defects that would affect system performance.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Protect other work from damage caused by cleaning, preparation, and application of
waterproofing. Provide temporary enclosure to ensure adequate ambient temperatures and
ventilation conditions for application.

C. Do not allow waterproofing, patching, and plugging materials to enter reveals or annular
spaces intended for resilient sealants or gaskets, such as joint spaces between pipes and pipe
sleeves.

D. Stop active water leaks with plugging compound.

E. Repair damaged or unsatisfactory substrate with patching compound.

1. At holes and cracks 1.6 mm wide or larger in substrate, remove loosened chips and cut
reveal with sides perpendicular to surface, not tapered, and minimum 25 mm deep. Fill
reveal with patching compound flush with surface.

F. Surface Preparation: Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, mortar spatter, grease, oils,
paint, curing compounds, and form-release agents to ensure that waterproofing bonds to
surfaces.

1. Clean concrete surfaces according to ASTM D 4258.

a. Scratch- and Float-Finished Concrete: Etch with 10 percent muriatic acid

solution according to ASTM D 4260.
b. Smooth-Formed and Trowel-Finished Concrete: Prepare by mechanical
abrading or abrasive-blast cleaning according to ASTM D 4259.

2. Clean concrete unit masonry surfaces according to ASTM D 4261.

a. Lightweight Concrete Unit Masonry: Etch with 10 percent muriatic acid solution
or abrade surface by wire brushing. Remove acid residue until pH readings of

POLYMER MODIFIED CEMENT WATERPROOFING - ARCHITECTURAL 071614 - Page 5 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

water after rinse are not more than 1.0 pH lower or 2.0 pH higher than pH of
water before rinse.
b. Medium- and Normal-Weight Concrete Unit Masonry: Sandblast or
bushhammer to a depth of 1.6 mm.

3. Concrete Joints: Clean reveals.

3.3 PREPARATION AT TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS

A. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through

waterproofing and at, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 898 or ASTM C 1471 and
manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Prime substrate unless otherwise instructed by waterproofing manufacturer.

C. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications, and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the
first preparation coat when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

1. Provide sealant cants around penetrations and at inside corners of deck-to-wall butt
joints when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

3.4 APPLICATION

A. General: Comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions for application and
curing.

1. Saturate surface with water and maintain damp condition until applying waterproofing.
Remove standing water.
2. Apply waterproofing to surfaces, and extend waterproofing onto adjacent surfaces as
shown on Drawings.
3. Number of Coats: Two.

a. Coating Thickness: Maximum application thickness of 1.2 mm per coat for total
thickness as required for specified water permeability.
b. Apply first coat as a slurry with brush or roller, and apply subsequent coats with
brush, roller, spray, or trowel.
c. Vigorously work first coat onto the substrate, forcing the material into surface
voids. Apply each subsequent coat into full contact with previous coat.
d. Allow manufacturer's recommended time between coats. Dampen surface
between coats.

B. Final Coat Finish: Smooth troweled.

C. Curing: Cure waterproofing for not less than five days immediately after application and prior
to being placed in service.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect applied polymer modified cement waterproofing from rapid drying, severe weather
exposure, and water accumulation. Maintain completed Work in moist condition for not less
than 7 days by covering with impervious sheeting or by other curing procedures recommended
by waterproofing manufacturer.

POLYMER MODIFIED CEMENT WATERPROOFING - ARCHITECTURAL 071614 - Page 6 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Engage a site representative qualified by waterproofing system manufacturer to inspect

substrate conditions, surface preparation; system application, protection, and drainage
components, and to furnish daily reports to Engineer.

B. Flood Testing: Flood test each deck area for leaks, according to ASTM D 5957, after
completing waterproofing but before overlying construction is placed. Install temporary
containment assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with potable water.

1. Flood to an average depth of 65 mm with a minimum depth of 25 mm and not exceeding

a depth of 100 mm. Maintain 50 mm of clearance from top of sheet flashings.
2. Flood each area for 48 hours.
3. After flood testing, repair leaks, repeat flood tests, and make further repairs until
waterproofing installation is watertight.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

END OF SECTION 071614

POLYMER MODIFIED CEMENT WATERPROOFING - ARCHITECTURAL 071614 - Page 7 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

WARSECTION 071616 - CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes crystalline waterproofing for internal waterproofing to tanks and
internal concrete surfaces in contact with water and as shown on drawings.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for finishing concrete walls and slabs to
receive waterproofing.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. Include recommendations for substrate
preparation, method of application, number of coats and coverage.

1. Sample Warranty: Copy of waterproofing Applicator's proposed warranty stating

obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions

B. Material Certificates: For each product, signed by manufacturers.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Applicator Qualifications: An experienced applicator who has completed crystalline

waterproofing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and
whose work has resulted in application with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain crystalline waterproofing products and materials through one
source from a single manufacturer.

1.5 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Proceed with waterproofing work only after pipe sleeves, vents, curbs, inserts, drains, and
other projections through the substrate to be waterproofed have been completed. Proceed
only after concrete and masonry substrate defects, including honeycombs, voids, and cracks,
have been repaired to provide a sound substrate free of forming materials, including reveal
inserts.

CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING 071616 - Page 1 of 5

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ST-01 REV 0
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

B. Ambient Conditions: Proceed with waterproofing work only if temperature is maintained at

5 deg C or above during work and cure period and space is well ventilated and kept free of
water.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by Applicator and countersigned by Contractor,

agreeing to repair or replace waterproofing that does not comply with requirements or that
fails to perform as required, and to maintain watertight conditions within specified warranty
period. Warranty includes responsibility for removing and replacing construction and other
work that conceals crystalline waterproofing.

B. Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are
jointly and severally liable and agree to repair or replace all defective components of the
warranted item. Warranty shall include both, materials and workmanship. All parties are
also agreeing to replace waterproofing material that does not comply with requirements or
that does not remain watertight within specified warranty period. Warranty includes
responsibility for removing and replacing construction and other work that conceals
modified bituminous sheet waterproofing

C. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion of the Project.

D. Warranty shall include:

• Defective materials and installation.

• Failure to comply with requirements stated in technical specifications.
• Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
• Delamination of exterior or interior facing materials.
• Making good and installation and finishing all items that are disturbed and that
may be required due to repair or replacement of defective items. Coordinate with
Employer, manufacturer, and installer of adjacent disturbed items to ensure that
their warranty is not cancelled due to the repair work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Crystalline Waterproofing: A blend of portland cement, specially treated sand, and active
chemicals formulated to penetrate by capillary action into concrete and chemically react
with free lime in the presence of water to develop crystalline growth within concrete
capillaries. This produces impervious, dense, waterproof substrate; with properties
complying with or exceeding the following criteria:

1. Permeability: Maximum zero for water at 9 m when tested according to

CE CRDC 48.

CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING 071616 - Page 2 of 5

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ST-01 REV 0
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2. Compressive Strength: Minimum 60 MPa at 28 days when tested according to

ASTM C 109/C 109M.
3. Flexural Strength: Minimum 6 MPa at 28 days when tested according to ASTM
C 348.
4. Bond Strength: 5 MPa at 14 days when tested according to ASTM C 321.

B. Patching Compound: Ready-mixed cementitious waterproofing and repair mortar for filling
and patching tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other imperfections with properties
meeting or exceeding the following:

1. Compressive Strength: 60 MPa at 28 days when tested according to ASTM

C 109/C 109M.
2. Flexural Strength: 5 MPa at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 348.
3. Shrinkage: Minus 0.01 percent at 28 days and plus 0.07 percent at 90 days when
tested according to ASTM C 596.

C. Plugging Compound: Cementitious, ready-mixed, efflorescence-free, surface waterproofing

compound with hydrophobic properties that requires only the addition of water, and is
resistant to water and moisture but is vapor permeable for all standard applications (vertical,
overhead and horizontal surfaces not exposed to vehicular traffic); with properties meeting
or exceeding the following criteria:

1. Permeability: 9 m when tested according to CE CRDC 48.

2. Compressive Strength: 41 MPa at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
3. Flexural Strength: 7 MPa at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 348.
4. Bond Strength: 2 MPa at 14 days when tested according to ASTM C 321.

D. Water: Potable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine walls, floors, and other surfaces where waterproofing is to be applied, for
compliance with requirements for surface preparation, cleaning, and other conditions
affecting waterproofing performance.

1. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect other work from dripping or splatter from crystalline waterproofing during
application. Provide temporary enclosure to confine operation, to prevent polluting the air,
and to ensure adequate ambient temperatures and ventilation conditions for application.

B. Stop active water leaks with plugging and patching compounds according to waterproofing
manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Schedule cleaning and surface preparation so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning
and preparation process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces.

CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING 071616 - Page 3 of 5

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ST-01 REV 0
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

D. Surface Preparation of Concrete: Comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written

instructions and requirements indicated below to ensure that waterproofing bonds to
concrete surfaces. Clean concrete surfaces according to ASTM D 4258 by using one or a
combination of procedures as needed to effectively remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt,
mortar spatter, grease, oils, curing compounds, and form-release agents.

1. Prepare smooth-formed and trowel-finished concrete by mechanical abrading or

abrasive-blast cleaning according to ASTM D 4259.
2. Concrete Joints: Clean reveals according to waterproofing manufacturer's written
instructions.

E. Mask-off surfaces adjoining areas to receive waterproofing treatment where surface damage
or discoloration might result from application of waterproofing. Do not allow crystalline
waterproofing or crystalline compound to migrate into reveals or annular spaces intended
for resilient sealants or gaskets, such as joint spaces between pipes and pipe sleeves.

F. At cracks in concrete, remove loosened chips and cut square reveal approximately 25 mm
deep.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. General: Comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions, unless more

stringent requirements are indicated.

B. Mix waterproofing components according to waterproofing manufacturer's written

instructions.

C. Protect all adjacent surfaces. Dampen surfaces with water before applying waterproofing.

D. Apply waterproofing coating evenly and fill voids and pores of substrate with waterproofing
slurry. Keep tools clean and free from build-up.

E. Apply the number of coats at the rates recommended by the manufacturer for each coat.
After allowing previous coat to cure, dampen the wall before applying additional coats.

F. Mist-cure waterproofing for two to three days immediately after application as

recommended by the manufacturer.

G. Waterproofing Treatment Extensions: Apply treatment to columns that are integral with
walls to be treated, and extend treatment onto interior, non-treated walls that intersect
exterior, treated walls, for a distance of 600 mm for cast-in-place concrete. Where floors
(but not walls) are treated, extend treatment 300 mm high onto exterior walls and onto both
exterior and interior columns. Unless otherwise indicated, extend treatment to every surface
of substrate in area indicated for treatment, including stair treads and risers, pipe trenches,
pipe chases, pits, sumps, and similar offsets and features.

CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING 071616 - Page 4 of 5

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ST-01 REV 0
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect applied crystalline waterproofing from rapid drying, severe weather exposure, and
water accumulation. Maintain completed Work in moist condition for not less than seven
days by covering with impervious sheeting or by other curing procedures recommended by
waterproofing manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 071616

CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING 071616 - Page 5 of 5

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-ST-01 REV 0
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

SECTION 071800 - TRAFFIC COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes traffic coatings and pavement markings for the following applications:

1. Pedestrian traffic.
2. Vehicular traffic.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit in compliance with Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures.”

B. Product Data: For each type of product, including installation instructions.

1. Comply with Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

C. Shop Drawings: For traffic coatings.

1. Include details for treating substrate joints and cracks, flashings, deck penetrations, and
other termination conditions.
2. Include plans showing layout of pavement markings, lane separations, and defined
parking spaces. Indicate, with international symbol of accessibility, spaces allocated
for people with disabilities.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish, prepared on rigid backing.

1. Provide stepped Samples on backing to illustrate buildup of traffic coatings.

F. Material test reports from a qualified accredited independent testing agency, approved by
Engineer, indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated.
Test report shall include manufacturer name and contacts in addition to tested product name
and detailed description.

TRAFFIC COATINGS 071800 - Page 1 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data:

1. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with
project name, addresses, names of Engineer and Employers, and other information
specified.
2. For Testing Agency Qualifications include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of traffic coating.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For traffic coatings to include in maintenance manuals.

1.7 LOCAL REGULATIONS AND CODES

A. Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, and regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.

1. Obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Comply with Egyptian Codes and Standards requirements and latest circulars.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Comply with Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements.”

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems

similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As
applicable, procure products from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements,
warranty requirements, and technical or factory-authorized service representative
requirements. Experience: Minimum of 10 years.

C. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, applying, or

assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project,
whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
Experience: Minimum of 5 years.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An accredited, independent agency with the experience and
capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E329; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to
authorities.

E. Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup for each traffic coating and substrate to receive traffic coatings.

TRAFFIC COATINGS 071800 - Page 2 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2. Size: As directed by Engineer of each substrate to demonstrate surface preparation,

joint and crack treatment, thickness, texture, color, and standard of workmanship.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Engineer specifically approves such
deviations in writing.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Apply traffic coatings within the range of ambient and substrate
temperatures recommended in writing by manufacturer. Do not apply traffic coatings to damp
or wet substrates, when temperatures are below 5 deg C, when relative humidity exceeds 85
percent, or when temperatures are less than 3 deg C above dew point.

1. Do not apply traffic coatings in rain, fog, or mist, or when such weather conditions are
imminent during the application and curing period. Apply only when frost-free
conditions occur throughout the depth of substrate.

B. Do not install traffic coating until items that penetrate membrane have been installed.

C. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at
a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 4.4 deg C for oil-based materials, and not
exceeding 35 deg C.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Comply with Division 01 Section "Warranties".

B. Special Warranty: Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and
Contractor are jointly and severally responsible and to replace traffic coating that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Adhesive or cohesive failures.

b. Abrasion or tearing failures.
c. Surface crazing or spalling.
d. Intrusion of water, oils, gasoline, grease, salt, deicer chemicals, or acids into
deck substrate.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Mapei.
2. Sika.

TRAFFIC COATINGS 071800 - Page 3 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

3. Jotun.
4. BASF.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility: Provide primers; base-, intermediate-, and topcoat; and accessory
materials that are compatible with one another and with substrate under conditions of service
and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Source Limitations:

1. Obtain traffic coatings from single source from single manufacturer.

2. Obtain primary traffic-coating materials, including primers, from traffic-coating
manufacturer. Obtain accessory materials including aggregates, sheet flashings, joint
sealants, and substrate repair materials of types and from sources recommended in
writing by primary material manufacturer.
3. Obtain pavement-marking paint from single source from single manufacturer.

2.3 TRAFFIC COATING

A. Traffic Coating: Manufacturer's standard, traffic-bearing, seamless, high-solids-content, cold

liquid-applied, elastomeric, waterproofing membrane system with integral wearing surface
for pedestrian traffic vehicular traffic; according to ASTM C 957.

B. Vehicular Traffic Coating Grade: Use heavy-duty grade at ramps and turning areas; use
medium duty grade at driving aisles and parking bays, all as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Primer: Liquid primer recommended for substrate and conditions by traffic-coating

manufacturer.

1. Material: Epoxy.
2. Thicknesses: Minimum dry film thickness; 150 micron, but not less than recommended
in writing by manufacturer for substrate and service conditions indicated.

D. Intermediate Waterproofing Membrane Coat: High-solids content, cold liquid-applied

elastomeric polyurethane waterproofing membrane.

1. Thicknesses: Minimum dry film thickness; 500-700 micron, but not less than
recommended in writing by manufacturer for substrate and service conditions
indicated, measured excluding aggregate.

E. Aggregate: Uniformly graded, washed silica sand of particle sizes, shape, and minimum
hardness recommended in writing by traffic-coating manufacturer.

1. Spreading Rate: As recommended by manufacturer for substrate and service

conditions indicated, but not less than the following:

a. Intermediate Coat: 4.5 to 5.44 kg/10 sq. m.

TRAFFIC COATINGS 071800 - Page 4 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

F. Topcoat: Aliphatic urethane.

1. Thicknesses: Minimum dry film thickness; 200-400 micron, but not less than
recommended in writing by manufacturer for substrate and service conditions
indicated, measured excluding aggregate.
2. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range for each application
area.

G. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide traffic-coating materials with the fire-test-

response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method below for
deck type and slopes indicated by an independent testing and inspecting agency that is
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Class A roof covering per ASTM E 108 or UL 790.

2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Joint Sealants: ASTM C 920.

B. Sheet Flashing: Nonstaining sheet material recommended in writing by traffic-coating

manufacturer.

1. Thickness: Minimum 1.5 mm.

C. Adhesive: Contact adhesive recommended in writing by traffic-coating manufacturer.

D. Reinforcing Strip: Fiberglass mesh recommended in writing by traffic-coating manufacturer.

2.5 INTERIOR ROADS/PAVEMENT MARKINGS

A. Pavement-Marking Paint: As recommended by Traffic Coating System manufacturer to

ensure the compatibility between the base coating and the flexible retroreflective marking
paint material.

1. Color: As indicated for each application on Drawings and Details.

B. Glass Beads: AASHTO M 247, Type 1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for surface smoothness, surface moisture, and other conditions affecting
performance of traffic coating Work.

B. Verify that substrates are visibly dry and free of moisture.

1. Test for moisture content by method recommended in writing by traffic-coating

manufacturer.

TRAFFIC COATINGS 071800 - Page 5 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of

traffic-coating work.

D. Proceed with installation only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been
completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Begin coating application only after minimum concrete-curing and -drying period
recommended in writing by traffic-coating manufacturer has passed and after substrates
are dry.
2. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Before applying traffic coatings, clean and prepare substrates according to
ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce clean, dust-free, dry
substrate for traffic-coating application. Remove projections, fill voids, and seal joints if any,
as recommended in writing by traffic-coating manufacturer.

B. Schedule preparation work so dust and other contaminants from process do not fall on wet,
newly coated surfaces.

C. Mask adjoining surfaces not receiving traffic coatings to prevent overspray, spillage, leaking,
and migration of coatings. Prevent traffic-coating materials from entering deck substrate
penetrations and clogging weep holes and drains.

D. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically abrade surface to a uniform profile acceptable to

manufacturer, according to ASTM D 4259. Do not acid etch.

1. Remove grease, oil, paints, and other penetrating contaminants from concrete.
2. Remove concrete fins, ridges, and other projections.
3. Remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, concrete hardeners, form-
release agents, and other incompatible materials that might affect coating adhesion.
4. Remove remaining loose material to provide a sound surface, and clean surfaces
according to ASTM D 4258.

3.3 TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS

A. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through traffic
coatings and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 1127 and
manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide sealant cants at penetrations and at reinforced and nonreinforced, deck-to-wall butt
joints.

C. Terminate edges of deck-to-deck expansion joints with preparatory base-coat strip.

D. Install sheet flashings at deck-to-wall expansion and dynamic joints, and bond to deck and
wall substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

TRAFFIC COATINGS 071800 - Page 6 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

3.4 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT

A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrates according to ASTM C 1127 and
manufacturer's written recommendations. Before coating surfaces, remove dust and dirt from
joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.

1. Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for joint-sealant installation.

B. Apply reinforcing strip in traffic-coating system where recommended in writing by traffic-

coating manufacturer.

3.5 TRAFFIC-COATING APPLICATION

A. Apply traffic coating according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply number of coats of specified compositions for each type of traffic coating at locations
as indicated on Drawings.

C. Start traffic-coating application in presence of manufacturer's technical representative.

D. Verify that wet film thickness of each coat complies with requirements every 9 sq. m.

E. Uniformly broadcast aggregate on coats specified to receive aggregate. Embed aggregate

according to manufacturer's written instructions. After coat dries, sweep away excess
aggregate.

F. Apply traffic coatings to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces to height indicated;
omit aggregate on vertical surfaces.

G. Cure traffic coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination

and damage during application and curing stages.

3.6 INTERIOR ROADS/PAVEMENT MARKINGS

A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint for striping and other markings until layout, colors, and
placement have been verified with Engineer and traffic coating has cured.

B. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.

C. Apply pavement-marking paint with mechanical equipment to produce markings of

dimensions indicated with uniform straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended
rates for a 200 micron-minimum, dry film thickness.

1. Apply graphic symbols and lettering with paint-resistant, die-cut stencils, firmly
secured to surface. Mask an extended area beyond edges of each stencil to prevent paint
application beyond stencil. Apply paint so that it cannot run beneath stencil.
2. Broadcast glass beads uniformly into wet pavement-marking paint at a rate of 0.72
kg/L.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing: Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field
tests and inspections:

TRAFFIC COATINGS 071800 - Page 7 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

1. Materials Testing:

a. Samples of material delivered to Project site shall be taken, identified, sealed,

and certified in presence of Employer and Contractor.
b. Testing agency shall perform tests for characteristics specified, using applicable
referenced testing procedures.
c. Testing agency shall verify thickness of coatings during traffic-coating
application for each 56 sq. m of installed traffic coating or part thereof.

B. Flood Testing for systems having waterproofing membrane: Flood test each deck area for
leaks, according to recommendations in ASTM D 5957, after traffic coating has completely
cured. Install temporary containment assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with potable
water.

1. Flood to an average depth of 65 mm with a minimum depth of 25 mm and not exceeding

a depth of 100 mm.
2. Flood each area for 48 hours.
3. After flood testing, repair leaks, repeat flood tests, and make further repairs until traffic
coating installation is watertight.

C. Final Traffic-Coating Inspection: Arrange for traffic-coating manufacturer's technical

personnel to inspect membrane installation on completion.

1. Notify Engineer or Employer 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.

D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.8 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect traffic coatings from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

END OF SECTION 071800

TRAFFIC COATINGS 071800 - Page 8 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Building Thermal insulation.

2. Building Acoustic insulation.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 07 Sections "Ethylene-Propylene-Diene-Monomer (EPDM) Roofing” for

insulation specified as part of roofing construction.
2. Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for insulation installed as part of a
perimeter fire-resistive joint system.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers, or

glass fibers; produced in boards and blanket with latter formed into batts (flat-cut lengths) or
rolls.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Thermal Insulation: Requirements specified in this Section or indicated on Drawings are the
minimum. Upon selection of insulation material thickness, density and type; Contractor
shall ensure compliance with required performance for each application area.

B. Buildings U-Values:

1. High performing External Walls, U Value= 0.40 W/m2.K.

2. High performing Roof, U Value= 0.25 W/m2.K.

C. Plenum Rating: Provide glass and slag-wool-fiber/rock-wool-fiber insulation where

indicated in ceiling plenums whose test performance is rated as follows for use in plenums
as determined by testing identical products per "Erosion Test" and "Mold Growth and
Humidity Test" described in UL 181, or on comparable tests from another standard
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Erosion Test Results: Insulation shows no visible evidence of cracking, flaking,

peeling, or delamination of interior surface of duct assembly, after testing for 4 hours
at 13-m/s air velocity.

THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - Page 1 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2. Mold Growth and Humidity Test Results: Insulation shows no evidence of mold
growth, delamination, or other deterioration due to the effects of high humidity, after
inoculation with Chaetomium globosium on all surfaces and storing for 60 days at
100 percent relative humidity in the dark.

D. Acoustic Insulation Requirements: Comply with requirements indicated in Acoustic

Reports.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit in compliance with Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures.”

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1. Comply with Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units for each type of exposed insulation indicated.

D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency for insulation products. Test report shall include manufacturer name and
contacts in addition to tested product name and detailed description.

E. Qualification Data:

1. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with
project name, addresses, names of Engineer and Employers, and other information
specified.
2. For Testing Agency Qualifications include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

1.6 LOCAL REGULATIONS AND CODES

A. Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, and regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.

1. Obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Comply with Egyptian Codes and Standards requirements and latest circulars.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Comply with Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements.”

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a
single manufacturer.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-
test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test
method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable
testing and inspecting agency.

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.

THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - Page 2 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.

3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.

D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems

similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As
applicable, procure products from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements,
warranty requirements, and technical or factory-authorized service representative
requirements. Experience: Minimum of 10 years.

E. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, applying, or

assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project,
whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
Experience: Minimum of 5 years.

F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An accredited, independent agency with the experience and
capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E329; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to
authorities.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture,
soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's
written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Comply with Division 01 Section "Warranties".

B. Special Warranty: Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and
Contractor are jointly and severally responsible and to replace thermal insulation that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:

1. Dow Chemical Company (The).

2. Advechems.
3. Isocam.
4. Saudi Rockwool.
5. Blue Foam (Banysweif).
6. Owens Corning.
7. Thermafiber.

THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - Page 3 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

8. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc.

9. Knauf Fiber Glass.

2.2 SLAG-WOOL-FIBER/ROCK-WOOL-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION

A. Unfaced, Slag-Wool-Fiber/Rock-Wool-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I

(blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and
smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion
characteristics.

1. Unfaced fiber blanket insulation shall be properly bound and treated such that it will
produce no dust or loose fibers in the ceiling plenum

B. Faced, Slag-Wool-Fiber/Rock-Wool-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III

(blankets with reflective membrane facing), Class A (membrane-faced surface with a flame
spread of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil-scrim-kraft,
foil-scrim, or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on 1 face.

1. Thickness and Density: As required to achieve target overall U-value.

2.3 MINERAL-WOOL BOARD INSULATION

A. Mineral-Wool Board, Type II, Faced: ASTM C 612, Type II; faced on one side with foil-
scrim or foil-scrim vapor retarder; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed
indexes of 15 and zero, respectively, per ASTM E 84. Nominal density of 6 lb/cu. ft. (96
kg/cu. m).

1. Thickness and Density: As required to achieve target overall U-value.

2.4 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD

A. Extruded Polystyrene Board, Type VII: ASTM C 578, Type VII, 414-kPa minimum
compressive strength; maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450,
respectively, per ASTM E 84.

1. Use for totally concealed applications indicated on Drawings including but not
limited to insulation for roofs and floors subject to pedestrian traffic.
2. Thickness: As required to achieve target overall U-value.

2.5 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS

A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, (0.25 mm) thick, with maximum permeance
rating of (7.5 ng/Pa x s x sq. m).

B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by insulation

manufacturers for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor-retarder facings.

C. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation
securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.

THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - Page 4 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2.6 INSULATION FASTENERS

A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of

holding insulation of thickness indicated securely in position indicated with self-locking
washer in place; and complying with the following requirements:

1. Available Products:

a. AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers.

b. Eckel Industries of Canada; Stic-Klip Type N Fasteners.
c. Gemco; Spindle Type.

2. Plate: Perforated galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.762 mm thick by 50 mm square.

3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low carbon steel; fully annealed; 2.67 mm in diameter;
length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

B. Adhesively Attached, Angle-Shaped, Spindle-Type Anchors: Angle welded to projecting

spindle; capable of holding insulation of thickness indicated securely in position indicated
with self-locking washer in place; and complying with the following requirements:

1. Available Products:

a. Gemco; 90-Degree Insulation Hangers.

2. Angle: Formed from 0.762-mm- thick, perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet with
each leg 50 mm square.
3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low carbon steel; fully annealed; 2.67 mm in diameter;
length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

C. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.41-mm- thick

galvanized steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold
insulation securely in place, but not less than 38 mm square or in diameter.

1. Available Products:

a. AGM Industries, Inc.; RC150.

b. AGM Industries, Inc.; SC150.
c. Gemco; Dome-Cap.
d. Gemco; R-150.
e. Gemco; S-150.

2. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to
ensure permanent retention of cap in the following locations:

a. Crawlspaces.
b. Ceiling plenums.
c. Attic spaces.
d. Where indicated.

D. Insulation Standoff: Spacer fabricated from galvanized mild-steel sheet for fitting over
spindle of insulation anchor to maintain air space between face of insulation and substrate to
which anchor is attached.

1. Available Products:

THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - Page 5 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

a. Gemco; Clutch Clip.

E. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors

securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates.

1. Available Products:

a. AGM Industries, Inc.; TACTOO Adhesive.

b. Eckel Industries of Canada; Stic-Klip Type S Adhesive.
c. Gemco; Tuff Bond Hanger Adhesive.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions
affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing

projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation
attachment.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and

application indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at
any time to ice, rain, and snow.

C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit
tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere
with placement.

D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls,

coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and
insulation encapsulates piping.

E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from
manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation
units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required
to make up total thickness.

THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - Page 6 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's

written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with
adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Install mineral-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the

following requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members.
If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a
snug fit between ends.
2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit
between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3. Maintain 76-mm clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures.
4. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic
spaces at vented eaves.
5. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 2438 mm, support
unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of
insulation to flanges of metal studs.

C. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type

insulation anchors as follows:

1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive

according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to
insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and
application indicated.
2. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated between
concrete substrate and insulation.
3. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position
over spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking
care not to compress insulation below indicated thickness.
4. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped
washers to tips of spindles.

D. Install board insulation in curtain-wall construction where indicated on Drawings according

to curtain-wall manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Retain insulation in place by metal clips and straps or integral pockets within window
frames, spaced at intervals recommended in writing by insulation manufacturer to
hold insulation securely in place without touching spandrel glass. Maintain cavity
width of dimension indicated between insulation and glass.
2. Install insulation where it contacts perimeter fire-containment system to prevent
insulation from bowing under pressure from perimeter fire-containment system.

E. Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where
shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a
density of approximately 40 kg/cu. m.

THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - Page 7 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

3.5 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN CEILINGS FOR SOUND ATTENUATION

A. Install 76-mm- thick unless otherwise indicated, unfaced slag-wool-fiber/rock-wool-fiber

blanket insulation over suspended ceilings at partitions in a width that extends insulation
1219 mm on either side of partition.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather
exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures
where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent
construction immediately after installation.

END OF SECTION 072100

THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - Page 8 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

SECTION 074213.16 - METAL PLATE WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes metal plate wall panels for the following applications:

1. Aluminum Screens Panels unless otherwise indicated shall be as follows:

a. ALUM-05.
b. ALUM-19.
c. As indicated on Drawings.

2. Aluminum Cladding Panels and Soffit Panels unless otherwise indicated shall be as
follows:

a. ALUM-5A.
b. ALUM-15.
c. ALUM-16.
d. ALUM-17.
e. ALUM-23.
f. ALUM-113.
g. As indicated on Drawings.

3. Architectural Feature Cladding Panels unless otherwise indicated shall be as follows:

a. ALUM-09.
b. ALUM-10.
c. ALUM-21.
d. ALUM-108.
e. ALUM-109.
f. As indicated on Drawings.

4. The works of this Section shall be completely coordinated with the works of curtain
walls and window walls specified in Division 8, Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain
Walls and Window Walls" to provide weathertight façade assemblies and structurally
coordinated fixation details according to approved shop drawings and structural
calculations.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 7 Section "Metal Composite Material Wall Panels" for metal-faced

composite wall cladding.
2. Division 08 Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls and Window Walls" for
integration with curtain walls.

METAL PLATE WALL PANELS 074213.16 - Page 1 of 18

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

C. Refer to Material “tags” indicated on Exterior Building Materials Drawings related to the
work of this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Metal Plate Wall Panel Assembly: Metal plate wall panels, attachment system components,
miscellaneous metal framing, and accessories necessary for a complete wall system.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Meet with Employer, Engineer, Employer's insurer if applicable, metal panel

Installer, metal panel manufacturer's representative, structural-support Installer, and
installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal panels, including installers of
doors, windows, and louvers.
2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,
Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
3. Review methods and procedures related to metal panel installation, including
manufacturer's written instructions.
4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment
between and attachment to structural members.
5. Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of
other construction that affect metal panels.
6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests
and inspections if applicable.
7. Review temporary protection requirements for metal panel assembly during and after
installation.
8. Review procedures for repair of metal panels damaged after installation.
9. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and
furnish copy of record to each participant.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit in compliance with Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures.”

B. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Comply with Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

2. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory.
3. Submit design calculation for fixation for Engineer’s approval.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal plate wall panel assembly indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria:

1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional
engineer responsible for their preparation.
2. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in
the Contract Documents.
3. Include list of applicable building codes, design loads and other factors applied.

METAL PLATE WALL PANELS 074213.16 - Page 2 of 18

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

4. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required,

submit a written request for additional information to Engineer.
5. Coordinate submittal of structural data related to supporting systems, as required to
accommodate delegated design.
6. Provide structural design and locations of anchors and connections for metal wall
panels to supporting structure. Provide engineering design as required to
accommodate structure indicated.
7. Certification by qualified professional engineer that the design of metal wall panels,
including connections to supporting structure, is in compliance with the Contract
Documents, and with applicable building codes.
8. Include shop drawings specified in this Section.
9. Sample calculation from the manufacturer to determine the actual stress and
deflection of the aluminum and the laminating material. The size, spacing and
mechanical properties of screws to be used in fixing must be indicated, including the
flexural strength testing certificates as per the ASTM E1592 standard.
10. Anchors and Connections:

a. Anchors, connections and assemblies connecting the metal wall systems

components and associated fabrications to the supporting construction are
shown on the Drawings as suggested locations for the metal wall systems
manufacturer/installer's information. The metal wall systems manufacturer/
installer is responsible for the structural design of the connections and anchors,
including all connecting hardware, accessories and reinforcing necessary for
fabrication, and installation of the metal wall systems and associated
fabrications.
b. The metal wall systems manufacturer is to notify the Engineer in writing prior
to the submittal of shop drawings of any changes in the proposed locations of
connections and anchors.
c. The Engineer's review of shop drawings is not to be construed as removing
responsibility from the curtain wall manufacturer/installer for structural
failures related to design, fabrication, installation and fabrication service.

D. Shop Drawings:

1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge

conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment assembly, trim,
flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.
2. Submit Co-ordination Drawings where required for integration of different
construction elements. Show construction sequences and relationships of separate
components where necessary to avoid conflicts in utilisation of the space available.
3. Highlight, encircle or otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents on
the Shop Drawings.
4. Do not permit Shop Drawing copies without an appropriate final stamp or other
marking indicating the action taken by the Engineer to be used in connection with
construction.
5. Include elevations of aluminum cladding and adjacent construction. Indicate
tolerance provisions.
6. Include setting drawings, including plans and elevations for inserts and embedments
in supporting structure. Coordinate submittal with the work under other Sections.
7. Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim, and anchorage, at a scale of not less
than 1:10.

E. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal panel indicated with factory-applied
color finishes.

METAL PLATE WALL PANELS 074213.16 - Page 3 of 18

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.

F. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of
size indicated below.

1. Metal Panels: 305 mm long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, closures, and
other metal panel accessories.

G. Submit method statement for installation for Engineer’s approval.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data:

1. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with
project name, addresses, names of Engineer and Employers, and other information
specified.
2. For Testing Agency Qualifications include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

B. Product Test Reports: For each product, tests performed by a qualified testing agency. Test
report shall include manufacturer name and contacts in addition to tested product name and
detailed description.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For metal panels to include in maintenance manuals.

1.8 LOCAL REGULATIONS AND CODES

A. Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, and regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.

1. Obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Comply with Egyptian Codes and Standards requirements and latest circulars.

1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Comply with Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements.”

B. Manufacturer’s Qualifications:

1. The manufacturer shall have not less than ten (10) years experience in manufacturing
metal plate wall panels for projects of equivalent size and complexity as required by
the contract documents.
2. The manufacturer shall certify in writing that materials have been tested in
accordance with a certified quality assurance program and that the manufacturer has

METAL PLATE WALL PANELS 074213.16 - Page 4 of 18

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

supervised all elements of fabrication necessary for the manufacture of the metal plate
wall panels and that all materials have proven to be satisfactory for the use intended
by these contract documents.

C. Installer’s Qualifications:

1. The installer shall submit evidence of skill and not less than five (5) years specialized
experience with this product.
2. The installer shall be trained by the manufacturer.

D. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for metal plate wall panel assembly by a
qualified consulting engineering company or firm who is legally authorized to practice in
Egypt and has a minimum of 15 years of successful experience in data preparation in local
and international projects of identical systems and sizes indicated for this project.

E. Single Source Responsibility:

1. The work of this Section shall be performed and coordinated by one Manufacturer /
Fabricator for each metal wall plate type, who is regularly engaged in the
engineering, manufacture, fabrication, finishing and installation of wall system and
accessories of the same type and magnitude as required for this project.

a. Provide complete coordination of engineering, design, fabrication, and

installation of metal plate wall panels, and all other related components.
b. Coordinate fabrication, delivery and installation with work of other trades and
as required to meet the construction schedule.

F. Water-Jet Cutting: Firm experienced and specializing in abrasive water-jet shape cutting of
architectural metals; and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

G. Organic-Coating Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in successfully applying

organic coatings of type indicated to metals of types indicated and employing competent
control personnel to conduct continuing, effective quality-control program to ensure
compliance with requirements.

H. Testing Agency Qualifications: An accredited, independent agency with the experience and
capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E329; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to
authorities.

I. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical metal panel assembly as shown on Drawings, including

corner, soffits, supports, attachments, and accessories.
2. Water-Spray Test: Conduct water-spray test of mockup of metal panel assembly,
testing for water penetration according to AAMA 501.2.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Engineer specifically approves such
deviations in writing.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

J. Factory Visits and Witnessing Tests:

METAL PLATE WALL PANELS 074213.16 - Page 5 of 18

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

1. Inaddition to the expenses of the third party tests engaged by Contractor; Contractor
shall include a provision in his bid; for the attendance of the Employer
Representatives’, Consultant and other Consultants’ attendance during the factory
visits and third party witness tests including the expenses of travel in business class
flights, five star hotel accommodation and local transportation expenses. The
provision shall include two (2) Employer’s representatives, two (2) Main Consultant
representatives and one (1) Sub-consultant's representatives.

1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or
deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and
surface damage.

C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight
and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for
drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might
cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation.

1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers'
written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.12 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of
soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive
installation.

1.13 WARRANTY

A. Comply with Division 01 Section "Warranties".

B. Special Warranty: Total system warranty in which manufacturer, installer and contractor
are jointly and severally bound and agrees to repair or replace components of metal panel
systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.

b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

METAL PLATE WALL PANELS 074213.16 - Page 6 of 18

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

C. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-
applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to

ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General Performance: Metal plate wall panel assemblies shall comply with performance
requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other
defects in construction.

1. The works of this Section shall be completely coordinated with the works of curtain
walls and window walls specified in Division 8, Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain
Walls and Window Walls" to provide weathertight façade assemblies and structurally
coordinated fixation details according to approved shop drawings and structural
calculations.

B. Design Requirements:

1. General:

a. Design, engineer, fabricate, and install work in compliance with specified

standards, performance requirements, material selections, and requirements of
this and related sections.

1) Do not exceed the allowable design working stress of the materials

involved, including anchors and connections. Apply each load to
produce the maximum stress in each respective component of each metal
fabrication.

b. Provide work to withstand thermal movement, design wind pressure, gravity

loads, seismic loads, and movement of building structure without failure. Work
to remain free from defects.

1) Unacceptable Conditions: Noise or vibration created by thermal

movement, structural movement, or wind; thermal movement transferred
to building structure; loosening, weakening or failure of fasteners,
attachments or other components.

c. Regulations: Conform with the requirements of the applicable Building Code

as it pertains to engineering, design, fabrication and installation of system.
d. Perform tests in accordance with test methods indicated using specified
performance criteria.
e. Provide complete design calculations and drawings prepared by qualified

METAL PLATE WALL PANELS 074213.16 - Page 7 of 18

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

structural engineer who is registered in jurisdiction where project is located.

f. Drawings: The Drawings indicate the design concept in regard to the overall
size, shape and location of the system’s components.

1) Conditions not detailed shall be developed through the Contractor's shop

drawings to the same level of aesthetics and in compliance with the
performance criteria.

C. Coordination:

1. Coordinate the work of this Section with the following:

a. Division 8 Sections “Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls and Window Walls”, for
integrating connections, including closures, trim, fasciae; and for metal wall
panels integral with curtain wall framing.

2. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal wall panels. Furnish setting

drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves,
concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be
embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for
installation.
3. Coordinate installation of metal wall panels with adjacent construction to ensure that
wall assemblies, flashings, trim, and joint sealants, are protected against damage from
the effects of weather, age, corrosion, and other causes.

D. Delegated Design: Design metal plate wall panel assembly, including comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements
and design criteria indicated.

E. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of
the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 330:

1. Calculate structural loads according to ECP 201-2013 requirements and IBC to suit
project conditions.
2. Design wind loads shall follow the wind tunnel test; the latest edition of the Egyptian
local codes governing building loads, ECP 201-2013 (Chapter 7) with exposure
category “A”; latest edition of the American codes on design loads for buildings and
other structures, ASCE7 with exposure category “C”; the results of the wind tunnels
tests, whichever is more stringent. Basic wind speed is 33 m/s (3-second gust), 50
years return period..
3. Seismic Loads: Design as per ECP 201-2013 considering the following:

a. PGA=0.15g, Importance factor =1.0, R for the tower = 5.0., Soil class= B,
Service seismic interstory allowable drift = 0.01.

4. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

5. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/240 of the span.

F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of
joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on
surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): Uniform ± 30 deg C and ± 5 deg C temperature

gradient.

METAL PLATE WALL PANELS 074213.16 - Page 8 of 18

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

G. Design framing members and connections to withstand the indicated above loads without
exceeding the allowable stresses/deflection as per the below standards:

1. Aluminium design manual 2010.

2. AISC 2010.
3. ECP 205 Edition 2012.
4. AISI for cold formed sections.
5. ETAG manual for post installed anchors.
6. AS1288 for glass fins.
7. AAMA for screws and fasteners.

H. Anchors and Connections: Design, select and provide metal wall panel connections and
anchors, including all hardware, reinforcing, and accessories as required to comply with
specified performance requirements and work results in this Section.

1. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the design intent for locations and
configurations of anchor assemblies. Design final anchor assemblies and notify
Engineer of proposed changes to locations and configurations of anchors.

I. Buildings U-Values:

1. High performing External Walls, U Value= 0.40 W/m2.K.

2.2 PANEL MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Plate: ASTM B 209M. Alloy 3003-H14 unless higher performance alloy
recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221M, alloy 6063-T5, 6063-T6 unless higher performance
alloy recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

C. Provide thickness as indicated on Drawings, as necessary, to provide the required

architectural design appearance, to comply with performance requirements and structural
calculations and shop drawings approved by Engineer, but not less than the following:

1. Members formed from sheet: 3mm, minimum

2. Panels: 3mm, minimum, unless otherwise designated on the Drawings. Provide
stiffeners, as required, to maintain an out- of level flatness not to exceed 0.1% or
1.5mm in 1.5m, whichever is less.
3. Panels for canopy, soffit and fascia: 3mm thick, minimum, unless otherwise
designated on the Drawings.
4. Copings:

a. 5 mm thick, minimum, if walkable;

b. 3 mm thick, minimum, if non-walkable.

5. Bended aluminum sheet shall be brake-formed with v-cut corners.

6. Perforated panels: 4 mm, minimum. Provide stiffeners, as required, to maintain an
out-of-level flatness not to exceed 0.1% or 1.5mm in 1.5m, whichever is less.

2.3 METAL PLATE WALL PANELS, GENERAL

A. Metal Plate Wall Panels: Provide factory-formed, metal plate wall panels fabricated from
single sheets of metal formed into profile for installation method indicated. Include

METAL PLATE WALL PANELS 074213.16 - Page 9 of 18

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

attachment assembly components, panel stiffeners, and accessories required for weathertight
system.

1. Provide panels in sizes, configurations, depths, and patterns indicated, including solid
panels, perforated panels, column covers, custom water-jet-cut-patterned panels, and
panels for fascia, soffits, copings, closures, and trim.
2. Aluminum Sheet/Plate Thickness: Thickness shall be as indicated on Drawings and
stipulated by structural calculations to provide finished assemblies that are free from
denting or any sign of imperfections and withstand structural loads specified in this
Section and impact loads the panels may be subjected to during maintenance and
cleaning activities.
3. Attachment System Components: Select and provide attachment systems, fabricated
from extruded aluminum.

a. Include manufacturer's standard subgirts, perimeter extrusions, tracks, and

drainage channels panel stiffeners, panel clips, and anchor channels.
b. Alignment Pins: Stainless steel.
c. Select and provide attachment systems as required to accommodate open joints
and sealed joints where indicated, panel types and configurations, and
substrates indicated.

B. Aluminum Screens Panels:

1. Provide screen panels of sizes and configurations shown on the Drawings.

2. Material: Tension-leveled, smooth aluminum sheet, ASTM B 209M.
3. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings to provide finished assemblies that are free
from denting or any sign of imperfections and withstand structural loads specified in
this Section and impact loads the panels may be subjected to during maintenance and
cleaning activities.

a. Comply with requirements specified in Article 2.2 of this Section.

b. Alum-19: Thickness shall be not less than 8 mm unless otherwise indicated.

4. Fabricate metal screens with dimensions and patterns indicated on Drawings.

5. Perforation Patterns: As indicated on Drawings.
6. Corrugation/Wavy Profile: As indicated on Drawings and details and as per samples
submitted and approved by Engineer.
7. Perimeter and Intermediate Framing: Extruded aluminum of profiles and thicknesses
as required to support the screen structurally. Provide stiffeners, as required, to
conform to specified Performance requirements and Testing Requirements in this
specifications.
8. Profile and Edge Construction: As indicated on the Drawings.
9. No splicing is permitted.
10. Hooked-on system with concealed fasteners.
11. Operable Screen Panel: Provide operable screen panel of the same configuration of
the adjacent screens complete with all necessary hardware and accessories for
successful, safe and functional operation required from the operable screen.
12. Exterior Finish: Specified fluoropolymer finish, matching adjacent finishes.

C. Aluminum Cladding Panels:

1. Provide wall, soffit, column, coping cladding panels and where shown on the
Drawings. Provide sizes and thickness, as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Material: Tension-leveled, smooth aluminum sheet, ASTM B 209M, of thickness
indicated on Drawings to provide finished assemblies that are free from denting or

METAL PLATE WALL PANELS 074213.16 - Page 10 of 18

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

any sign of imperfections and withstand structural loads specified in this Section and
impact loads the panels may be subjected to during maintenance and cleaning
activities.
3. Form wall cladding to shapes indicated from aluminum panels. Return vertical edges
and bend to form hook that will engage continuous mounting clips
4. Fabricate metal cladding with dimensions and patterns indicated on Drawings.
5. Corrugation/Wavy Profile: As indicated on Drawings and details and as per samples
submitted and approved by Engineer.
6. Perimeter and Intermediate Framing: Extruded aluminum of profiles and thicknesses
as required to support the screen structurally. Provide stiffeners, as required, to
conform to specified Performance requirements and Testing Requirements in this
specifications.
7. Profile and Edge Construction: As indicated on the Drawings.
8. No splicing is permitted.
9. Hooked-on system with concealed fasteners.
10. Exterior Finish: Specified fluoropolymer PVDF finish, matching adjacent finishes.
11. Interior Finish: Where indicated, super durable polyester powder coating, matching
adjacent finishes.

D. Architectural Feature Cladding Panels:

1. Material: Tension-leveled, smooth aluminum sheet, ASTM B 209M, of thickness

indicated on Drawings to provide finished assemblies that are free from denting or
any sign of imperfections and withstand structural loads specified in this Section and
impact loads the panels may be subjected to during maintenance and cleaning
activities.
2. Form wall cladding to shapes indicated from aluminum metal and minimum of
thickness indicated. Return vertical edges and bend to form hook that will engage
continuous mounting clips
3. Fabricate metal cladding with dimensions and patterns indicated on Drawings.
4. Corrugation/Wavy Profile: As indicated on Drawings and details and as per samples
submitted and approved by Engineer.
5. Perimeter and Intermediate Framing: Extruded aluminum of profiles and thicknesses
as required to support the screen structurally. Provide stiffeners, as required, to
conform to specified Performance requirements and Testing Requirements in this
specifications.
6. Profile and Edge Construction: As indicated on the Drawings.
7. Perforation size, shape, pattern and density as indicated on Drawings and approved
by Engineer.
8. No splicing is permitted.
9. Hooked-on system with concealed fasteners.
10. Exterior Finish: Specified fluoropolymer PVDF finish, matching adjacent finishes.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring:

1. ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275
hot-dip galvanized coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZM150
aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide
manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel
system.
2. Extruded Aluminum Subframing and Furring as per ASTM B221M, Alloy 6063-
T5/T52.

METAL PLATE WALL PANELS 074213.16 - Page 11 of 18

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

B. Exterior Soffit Frame: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths
indicated, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 2.45 mm.

2. Flange Width: 51 mm, minimum.

C. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system
including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants,
gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels
unless otherwise indicated.

D. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from as required to seal against
weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases,
drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits,
reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal
panels.

E. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed
fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of plastic caps or factory-
applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners. Mechanical
properties, size and spacing of screws shall be determined thru calculations.

F. Panel Sealants: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type, grade,
class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal panels and remain weathertight;
and as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. Provide sealant types that are
compatible with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.

G. Structural Anchors: For applications indicated to comply with certain design loads, provide
chemical or torque-controlled expansion anchors fabricated from corrosion-resistant
materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load
imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when
installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency acceptable to Engineer with a global factor 200% and 400% for
concrete and masonry respectively. The following are to be submitted:

1. Product specifications with recommended design values and physical characteristics

for expansion anchors.
2. Samples: Representative length and diameters of each type anchor shown on the
Drawings.
3. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
characteristics and physical properties.
4. Certifications: Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, anchors shall have one
of the following certifications:

a. Certificates: European Technical Approval or Assessment (ETA).

b. European Technical Approval indicating conformance with the European
Technical Approval Guideline (ETAG) No. 001, Parts 2, 3 or 5.

5. Do not use chemical anchors for overhead conditions, nor for solid backup walls
where mechanical anchors can be used.

H. Anchor Materials for Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 2 (A4) stainless-steel bolts,
ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).

I. Electrolytic Isolators:

METAL PLATE WALL PANELS 074213.16 - Page 12 of 18

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

1. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12

requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 0.762-mm thickness per
coat.

J. Cavity Fire Barriers installed to the Back of External Cladding: Refer to requirements
specified in Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems".

K. Bird Screening:

1. Provide grade 316 stainless steel bird screen where shown on the Drawings. Mesh
shall be minimum 1.6 mm thickness and with openings not greater than 12 mm. Mesh
shall be installed in a grade 316 stainless steel frame.

L. Internal Lining (Where indicated): 12.5 mm, Gypsum boards as specified in Section
Division 09, Section "Gypsum Board".

M. Thermal Insulation:

1. Provide semi-rigid, mineral wool thermal insulation at spandrel and non-vision areas.
2. Performance requirements:

a. Shall satisfy the acoustic and thermal performance for each façade in each
tower. Comply with performance requirements specified in this Section and
acoustic reports.
b. Minimum thickness: 100 -150 mm but not less than required to satisfy the
overall thermal performance specified.
c. Minimum R-value: 17.4 (ºF∙ft2∙hr) / BTU, but not less than required to satisfy
the overall thermal performance specified.
d. Density: 130 kg/m3
e. The reinforced aluminum foil has to have minimum 2000 pinholes (1mm,
maximum size) per square foot for ventilation. The perimeter of the installed
insulation shall be foil-taped with reinforced aluminum foil.
f. Fire rating, flame spread rating and non-combustibility as per Article – Fire
Resistance Requirements.

3. Acceptable products: "Thermafibre" or equivalent and endorsed by the Engineer.

4. Seal joints in vapor barrier and any punctures or tears in the vapor barrier with
aluminum foil tape.
5. Insulation shall be retained by aluminum clips, aluminum straps, galvanized steel
straps, and pins with retaining disks or integral pockets within the unit frames.
Maximum spacing of clips and straps shall be 400 mm c/c welded or glued. Maintain
25mm nominal air space between insulation and glass and aluminum panel but a
35mm gap is recommended to consider the allowable 35mm center deflection of the
glass. Insulation shall be retained so as to not be able to touch exterior glass or
aluminum panel.
6. Where thermal insulation is unbraced, brace insulation where it contacts with the fire
safing to prevent bow of insulation from pressure exerted by the fire safing.

N. Lightning Protection:

1. Refer to Section “Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls and Window Walls” for
requirements of Earthing/Lightning Conductor for External Facade Systems and
Panel Cladding.

METAL PLATE WALL PANELS 074213.16 - Page 13 of 18

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's
standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance
requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with
dimensional and structural requirements.

B. Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that
provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise
from movements.

C. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's
recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"
that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.

1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning,
buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed
edges folded back to form hems.
2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form
seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
3. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with
flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
4. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate
sealant and to comply with SMACNA standards.
5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are
not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being
anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal
panel manufacturer.

a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or

metal wall panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of
metal being secured.

7. Custom Water-Jet-Cut-Patterned Panels:

a. Water-Jet-Cutting: Provide water-jet cutting services as required to produce

panels in patterns and configurations indicated. Comply with panel fabrication
requirements specified in this Section. Provide high-pressure abrasive water-jet
shape cutting utilizing precision computer numerically controlled methods, to
produce cuts that are smooth, with no burr or slag.

1) Patterns: As indicated on Drawings.

2.6 FINISHES

A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are

acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable
variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components
are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or
installed to minimize contrast.

METAL PLATE WALL PANELS 074213.16 - Page 14 of 18

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2.7 ALUMINUM FINISH

A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish designations and
application recommendations, except as otherwise indicated. Apply finishes in factory after
products assembly. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces prior to shipment. Remove
scratches and blemishes from exposed surfaces which will be visible after completing
finishing process.

B. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer (PVDF) (For all Exterior Aluminum Items): AAMA 2605.
Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both
color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces
to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

1. Where shown on Drawings or directed by Engineer. Provide all necessary tests and
warranty form for the approval of Engineer.
2. Minimum Total Dry Film Thickness: 40 microns (1.6 mils).
3. Color and Gloss: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.

C. Super Durable Polyester Powder Coating (For all Interior Aluminum Items): To meet the
requirements of AAMA 2604. Coating shall be based on specially-formulated polyester
resin of enhanced performance and shall pass Qualicoat class 2 standard and Florida test
specified in AAMA 2604 as demonstrated by test certificate available with manufacturer.
The coating is to be electrostatically sprayed on the object to produce a hard, durable
coating:

1. Surface Finish: Satin.

2. Dry Film Thickness: 90 microns except 60 microns for internal corners.

D. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored

acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum
total dry film thickness of 0.013 mm.

E. Color and Gloss: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.

1. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural
panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment
tolerances required by metal wall panel manufacturer.

B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual
locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

METAL PLATE WALL PANELS 074213.16 - Page 15 of 18

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support
members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's written
recommendations.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation,

sizes, and locations indicated. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise
indicated. Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with
provisions for thermal and structural movement.

1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal panels.

2. Flash and seal metal panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping
screws. Do not begin installation until air- or water-resistive barriers and flashings
that will be concealed by metal panels are installed.
3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.
4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
5. Install flashing and trim as metal panel work proceeds.
6. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel
splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.
7. Align bottoms of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping
screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self-
tapping screws.
8. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels.

B. Fasteners:

1. Aluminum Panels: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to

the exterior; use aluminum or galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the
interior.

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.

D. Attachment Assembly, General: Install attachment assembly required to support metal plate
wall panels and to provide a complete weathertight wall system, including subgirts,
perimeter extrusions, tracks, drainage channels, panel clips, and anchor channels.

1. Include attachment to supports, panel-to-panel joinery, panel-to-dissimilar-material

joinery, and panel-system joint seals.

E. Installation: Attach metal plate wall panels to supports at locations, spacings, and with
fasteners recommended by manufacturer to achieve performance requirements specified.

1. Wet Seal Systems: Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent metal plate
wall panels with sealant backing and sealant. Install sealant backing and sealant
according to requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
2. Dry Seal Systems: Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent metal
composite material wall panels with manufacturer's standard gasket system.
3. Rainscreen Systems: Do not apply sealants to joints unless otherwise indicated.

METAL PLATE WALL PANELS 074213.16 - Page 16 of 18

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

F. Clip Installation: Attach panel clips to supports at locations, spacings, and with fasteners
recommended by manufacturer. Attach flanges of metal plate wall panels to panel clips
with fasteners, as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent metal plate wall panels with
sealant backing and sealant. Install sealant backing and sealant according to
requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

G. Rainscreen-Principle Installation: Install using manufacturer's standard assembly with

vertical channel that provides support and secondary drainage assembly, draining at base of
wall. Notch vertical channel to receive support pins. Install vertical channels supported by
channel brackets or adjuster angles and at locations, spacings, and with fasteners
recommended by manufacturer. Attach metal plate wall panels by inserting horizontal
support pins into notches in vertical channels and into flanges of panels. Leave horizontal
and vertical joints with open reveal.

1. Install metal plate wall panels to allow individual panels to be installed and removed
without disturbing adjacent panels.
2. Do not apply sealants to joints unless otherwise indicated.

H. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and

weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with
flashings and other components.

1. Install components required for a complete metal panel system including trim,
copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and
similar items. Provide types indicated by metal panel manufacturer; or, if not
indicated, provide types recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.

I. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written

installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide
concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install
work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight.

1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks and that is
true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof
performance.
2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
Space movement joints at a maximum of 3 m with no joints allowed within 605 mm of
corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would
not be sufficiently waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges,
not less than 25 mm deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).

J. Installing Miscellaneous Steel Framing: Comply with AISC's "Specification for Structural
Steel Buildings - Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design," and install to accommodate
construction tolerances specified and as indicated on Shop Drawings.

1. Maintain erection tolerances of backup structure within AISC's "Code of Standard

Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
2. Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas immediately after erection.

a. Repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

METAL PLATE WALL PANELS 074213.16 - Page 17 of 18

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal plate wall panel units within installed
tolerance of 6 mm in 6 m, non-accumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines as
indicated, and within 3-mm offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field tests and
inspections.

B. Water-Spray Test: After installation, test area of assembly as directed by Engineer for water
penetration according to AAMA 501.2.

C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and

inspect completed metal wall panel installation, including accessories.

D. Remove and replace metal wall panels where tests and inspections indicate that they do not
comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, are performed to determine

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are
installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal
panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B. After metal panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt,
and sealant.

C. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair
by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION 074213.16

METAL PLATE WALL PANELS 074213.16 - Page 18 of 18

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

SECTION 074213.23 - METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes solid and perforated metal composite material panels cladding to vertical and
horizontal ceilings and soffits.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 07 Section "Polymer Modified Cement Waterproofing - Architectural" for

waterproofing external walls behind composite cladding system.
2. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for thermal insulation behind composite
aluminum cladding.
3. Division 07 Section "Metal Plate Wall Panels" for solid metal plate wall panels.
4. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for field-formed flashings and
other sheet metal work not part of metal-faced composite wall panel assemblies.

C. Refer to Material “tags” indicated on Exterior Building Materials Drawings related to the
work of this Section.

D. Coordination:

1. Coordinate installation of anchorages for composite metal wall panels. Furnish setting
drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves,
concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded
in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
2. Coordinate installation of composite metal wall panels with adjacent construction to
ensure that wall assemblies, flashings, trim, and joint sealants, are protected against
damage from the effects of weather, age, corrosion, and other causes.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Meet with Employer, Engineer, Employer's insurer if applicable, metal composite

material panel Installer, structural-support Installer, and installers whose work
interfaces with or affects metal composite material panels, including installers of doors,
windows, and louvers.
2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,
Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
3. Review methods and procedures related to metal composite material panel installation,
including manufacturer's written instructions.

METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 074213.23 - Page 1 of 15

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment

between and attachment to structural members.
5. Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of
other construction that affect metal composite material panels.
6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests
and inspections if applicable.
7. Review temporary protection requirements for metal composite material panel
assembly during and after installation.
8. Review procedures for repair of panels damaged after installation.
9. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and
furnish copy of record to each participant.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit in compliance with Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures.”

B. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Comply with Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

2. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory.
3. Submit design calculation for fixation for Engineer’s approval.
4. Company profile of the aluminum composite panel (ACP) manufacturer.
5. Project references using the proposed material (ACP) for a minimum of 15 years.
6. Proof and certification from manufacturer that no delamination and discoloration
occurs in the material (ACP) during its service life.
7. Sample calculation from the manufacturer to determine the actual stress and deflection
of the aluminum and the laminating material. The size, spacing and mechanical
properties of screws to be used in fixing must be indicated.
8. Should the External Façade Contractor fail to satisfy any of the above requirements,
The External Façade Contractor shall be required to use solid aluminum sheet, as a
material substitution.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal-faced composite wall panel assembly indicated to

comply with performance requirements and design criteria:
1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
2. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in
the Contract Documents.
3. Include list of applicable building codes, design loads and other factors applied.
4. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required,
submit a written request for additional information to Engineer.
5. Coordinate submittal of structural data related to supporting systems, as required to
accommodate delegated design.
6. Provide structural design and locations of anchors and connections for metal wall
panels to supporting structure. Provide engineering design as required to
accommodate structure indicated.
7. Certification by qualified professional engineer that the design of metal wall panels,
including connections to supporting structure, is in compliance with the Contract
Documents, and with applicable building codes.
8. Include shop drawings specified in this Section.
9. Sample calculation from the manufacturer to determine the actual stress and
deflection of the aluminum and the laminating material. The size, spacing and

METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 074213.23 - Page 2 of 15

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

mechanical properties of screws to be used in fixing must be indicated, including the

flexural strength testing certificates as per the ASTM E1592 standard.

D. Shop Drawings:

1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal composite material panels; details
of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment assembly,
trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.
2. Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim and anchorage, at a scale of not less
than 1:10.

E. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal composite material panel indicated with
factory-applied color finishes.

1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.

2. Include manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the
full range of colors available for each sealant exposed to view.

F. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of
size indicated below.

1. Metal Composite Material Panels: 305 mm long by actual panel width. Include
fasteners, closures, and other metal composite material panel accessories.
2. Trim and Closures: 300 mm long. Include fasteners and other accessories.
3. Accessories: 300-mm- long Samples for each type of accessory.
4. Exposed Gaskets: 300 mm long.
5. Exposed Sealants: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint
sealants in 13-mm- wide joints formed between two 150-mm- long strips of material
matching the appearance of metal-faced composite wall panels adjacent to joint
sealants.

G. Coordination Drawings: Exterior elevations, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items
involved:

1. Wall panels and attachments.

2. Sub-framing.
3. Wall-mounted items including doors, windows, louvers, and lighting fixtures.
4. Penetrations of wall by pipes and utilities.

H. Submit method statement for installation for Engineer’s approval.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data:

1. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with
project name, addresses, names of Engineer and Employers, and other information
specified.
2. For Testing Agency Qualifications include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 074213.23 - Page 3 of 15

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

B. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the
following:

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.

C. Product Test Reports: For each product, tests performed by a qualified testing agency. Test
report shall include manufacturer name and contacts in addition to tested product name and
detailed description.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For metal composite material panels to include in maintenance manuals.

1.7 LOCAL REGULATIONS AND CODES

A. Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, and regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.

1. Obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Comply with Egyptian Codes and Standards requirements and latest circulars.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Comply with Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements.”

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems

similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As
applicable, procure products from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements,
warranty requirements, and technical or factory-authorized service representative
requirements. Experience: Minimum of 15 years, in producing FR mineral core panels.

C. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by manufacturer. Experience: Minimum of 5 years.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal-faced composite wall panel from single
source from single manufacturer.

E. Testing Agency Qualifications: An accredited, independent agency with the experience and
capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where
required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 074213.23 - Page 4 of 15

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

F. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical metal composite material panel assembly as directed by

Engineer, including corner, soffits, supports, attachments, and accessories.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Engineer specifically approves such
deviations in writing.
3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Factory Visits and Witnessing Tests:

1. Inaddition to the expenses of the third party tests engaged by Contractor; Contractor
shall include a provision in his bid; for the attendance of the Employer
Representatives’, Consultant and other Consultants’ attendance during the factory
visits and third party witness tests including the expenses of travel in business class
flights, five star hotel accommodation and local transportation expenses. The provision
shall include two (2) Employer’s representatives, two (2) Main Consultant
representatives and one (1) Sub-consultant's representatives.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver components, metal composite material panels, and other manufactured items so as
not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal composite material panels for protection
during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect metal composite material panels in a manner to prevent bending,
warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack metal composite material panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with
suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal composite material panels to
ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal composite
material panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other
surface damage.

D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal composite material panels during installation.

1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit assembly of metal composite material panels to be performed according to
manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Field Measurements: Verify locations of structural members and wall opening dimensions
by field measurements before metal-faced composite wall panel fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.

METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 074213.23 - Page 5 of 15

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate metal composite material panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing,
trim, construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and
noncorrosive installation.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Comply with Division 01 Section "Warranties".

B. Special Warranty: Total system warranty in which manufacturer, installer and contractor are
jointly and severally bound and agrees to repair or replace components of metal composite
material panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.

b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.

2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair finish or replace metal composite material panels that show evidence of
deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General Performance: Metal-faced composite wall panel assemblies shall comply with
performance requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication,
installation, or other defects in construction.

B. Delegated Design: Design metal-faced composite wall panel assembly, including

comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.

C. Structural Performance: Provide metal composite material panel systems capable of

withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 330:

1. Calculate structural loads according to ECP 201-2013 requirements and IBC to suit
project conditions.

METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 074213.23 - Page 6 of 15

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2. Design wind loads shall follow the wind tunnel test; the latest edition of the Egyptian
local codes governing building loads, ECP 201-2013 (Chapter 7) with exposure
category “A”; latest edition of the American codes on design loads for buildings and
other structures, ASCE7 with exposure category “C”; the results of the wind tunnels
tests, whichever is more stringent. Basic wind speed is 33 m/s (3-second gust), 50 years
return period.
3. Seismic Loads: Design as per ECP 201-2013 considering the following:

a. PGA=0.15g, Importance factor =1.0, R for the tower = 5.0., Soil class= B,
Service seismic interstory allowable drift = 0.01.Equipment Loads: Allow for
loads due to cleaning and maintenance equipment.

4. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/240 of the span.

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of
joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on
surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): Uniform ± 30 deg C and ± 5 deg C temperature gradient.

E. Design framing members and connections to withstand the indicated above loads without
exceeding the allowable stresses/deflection as per the below standards:

1. Aluminium design manual 2010.

2. AISC 2010.
3. ECP 205 Edition 2012.
4. AISI for cold formed sections.
5. ETAG manual for post installed anchors.
6. AS1288 for glass fins.
7. AAMA for screws and fasteners.

F. Fire Retardant Core (FR): Noncombustible; shall have a Class “A” building material rating
when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 (Steiner Tunnel Test) or A2 according to
EN13501-1 (s1, d0).

G. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where required by Authorities having jurisdiction or if products

specified are part of fire-resistance rated-assemblies; Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a
qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing
agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings
of another qualified testing agency.

H. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Metal composite material wall panel system passes NFPA
285 testing.

I. Anchors and Connections: Design, select and provide composite wall panel connections and
anchors, including all hardware, reinforcing, and accessories as required to comply with
specified performance requirements and work results in this Section.

METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 074213.23 - Page 7 of 15

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2.2 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS

A. Metal Composite Material Wall Panel Systems: Provide factory-formed and -assembled,
metal composite material wall panels fabricated from two metal facings that are bonded to a
solid, extruded fire retardant core; formed into profile for installation method indicated.
Include attachment assembly components, panel stiffeners, and accessories required for
weathertight system.

1. Manufacturers:

a. AlucoBond, 3A Composite.
b. Mitsubishi.

B. Aluminum-Faced Composite Wall Panels: Formed with 0.50-mm- thick, coil-coated

aluminum sheet facings.

1. Panel Thickness: 6 mm.

2. Core: Fire retardant mineral core.

a. Fire Resistance: The panels shall consist of minimum 90% aluminum tri-
hydroxide (non-combustible core). A test report from EN 13501-1 and NFPA
285/BS 8414-1 or any international fire reports shall support indicate such
content in the composite panels. The fire performance of the panels shall pass
Class A2 following EN 13501-1.

3. ACP shall be tested for bond integrity in accordance with ASTM D1781 to simulate
the resistance to panel delamination. The peel strength between the core and the skin
or the cohesive failure of the core itself shall be 178N mm/mm.
4. The temper of the two (2) inner and outer aluminum sheets shall conform to ASTM
B209/B209M, Alloy 5005.

C. Attachment Assembly Components: Formed from extruded aluminum.

D. Attachment Assembly: As shown on Drawings.

E. Metal composite wall panels Column Covers: Form column covers to shapes indicated.

1. Material: Match aluminum-faced composite wall panels specified in this Section.

2. Joint Configuration: 4-joint round diameter column covers, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Dimensions: As detailed on Drawings.
4. Form returns at vertical joints to provide reveal at joints. Provide snap-in metal filler
strips at reveals that leave reveals.
5. Fabricate column covers with reveals at horizontal joints produced by forming returns
on mating ends of column cover sections. Provide snap-in metal filler strips at reveals
matching reveals at vertical joints. Locate horizontal joints as indicated.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-coated

steel sheet ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 hot-dip galvanized coating designation or
ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZM150 aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation unless
otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and
alignment of metal composite material panel system.

METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 074213.23 - Page 8 of 15

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

B. Subgirts: Manufacturer's standard C- or Z-shaped sections 1.60-mm nominal thickness,

minimum.

C. Zee Clips: 2.00-mm nominal thickness, minimum.

D. Base or Sill Channels: 2.00-mm nominal thickness, minimum.

E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels:

1. Nominal Thickness: As required to meet performance requirements.

2. Depth: As indicated, if not shown provide 38 mm depth.

F. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: Minimum 13-mm- wide flange.

1. Nominal Thickness: As required to meet performance requirements.

2. Depth: As indicated, if not shown provide 19 mm depth.
3. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with nominal
thickness of 1.00 mm, minimum.
4. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 1.50-mm-
diameter wire, or double strand of 1.20-mm- diameter wire.

G. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system
including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants,
gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal composite
material panels unless otherwise indicated.

H. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from composite materials required to
seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not
limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae,
parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as
adjacent metal composite material panels.

I. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed
fasteners with heads matching color of metal composite material panels by means of plastic
caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed
fasteners.

1. Aluminum composite panel (ACP) must be mechanically fixed to the structural

framing by screws. Mechanical properties, size and spacing of screws shall be
determined thru calculations. Aluminum composite panels (ACP) relying on structural
sealant, adhesive tape or alike is not acceptable.

J. Panel Sealants: ASTM C 920; silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications
required to seal joints in metal composite material panels and remain weathertight; and as
recommended in writing by metal composite material panel manufacturer.

METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 074213.23 - Page 9 of 15

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

K. Structural Anchors: For applications indicated to comply with certain design loads, provide
chemical or torque-controlled expansion anchors fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials
with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when
installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete,
as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing
agency acceptable to Engineer with a global factor 200% and 400% for concrete and masonry
respectively. The following are to be submitted:

1. Product specifications with recommended design values and physical characteristics

for expansion anchors.
2. Samples: Representative length and diameters of each type anchor shown on the
Drawings.
3. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
characteristics and physical properties.
4. Certifications: Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, anchors shall have one of
the following certifications:

a. Certificates: European Technical Approval or Assessment (ETA).

b. European Technical Approval indicating conformance with the European
Technical Approval Guideline (ETAG) No. 001, Parts 2, 3 or 5.

L. Cavity Fire Barriers installed to the Back of External Cladding: Refer to requirements
specified in Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems".

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish metal composite material panels and accessories at the factory,
by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated
performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated
profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

B. Metal-Faced Composite Wall Panels: Factory form panels in a continuous process with no
glues or adhesives between dissimilar materials. Trim and square edges of sheets with no
displacement of face sheets or protrusion of core material.

1. Form panel lines, breaks, and angles to be sharp and true, with surfaces free from
warp and buckle.
2. Fabricate panels with sharply cut edges, with no displacement of face sheets or
protrusion of core material.
3. Fabricate panels with panel stiffeners, as required to comply with deflection limits,
attached to back of panels with structural silicone sealant or bond tape.
4. Fabricate end route and back cut details for all straight, curved, and sloping fascia
soffit and profile conditions to maintain a consistent depth of profile as indicated on
Drawings.

C. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's
recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"
that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.

1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling,
and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded
back to form hems.
2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams
and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.

METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 074213.23 - Page 10 of 15

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

3. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate

sealant and to comply with SMACNA standards.
4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not
allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
5. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being
anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal
panel manufacturer.

a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or

metal wall panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal
being secured.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are

acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.

C. Aluminum Panels and Accessories:

1. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less

than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare,
pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin
manufacturers' written instructions.
2. Metallic Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Three-coat fluoropolymer finish with
suspended metallic flakes containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in
both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal
surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
3. Minimum Total Dry Film Thickness: Shall be assessed using the ASTM D1400 method
but not less than 40 microns (1.6 mils).
4. Color and Gloss: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
5. The outer surface of the inner aluminum sheet of the ACP shall be painted with ordinary
polyethylene or acrylic coatings with total dry film thickness range of 60 to 80 microns.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, metal composite material panel supports, and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural
panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances
required by metal composite material wall panel manufacturer.
2. Ensure that waterproofing has fully cured.

METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 074213.23 - Page 11 of 15

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

B. Examine roughing-in for components and assemblies penetrating metal composite material
panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal composite
material panels before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support
members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal composite material panel
manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.3 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal composite material panels according to manufacturer's written

instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install miscellaneous
steel framing, anchors, and connections to substrates indicated. Install panels perpendicular
to supports unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal composite material panels and other
components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural
movement.

1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal composite material panels.

2. Flash and seal metal composite material panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten
with self-tapping screws. Do not begin installation until air- or water-resistive barriers
and flashings that will be concealed by metal composite material panels are installed.
3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.
4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
5. Install flashing and trim as metal composite material panel work proceeds.
6. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices
and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.
7. Align bottoms of metal composite material panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts,
or self-tapping screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements
with self-tapping screws.
8. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels.

B. Fasteners:

1. Aluminum Panels: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to

the exterior; use aluminum or galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the
interior.

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect
against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal composite material panel
manufacturer.

D. Attachment Assembly, General: Install attachment assembly required to support metal

composite material wall panels and to provide a complete weathertight wall system, including
subgirts, perimeter extrusions, tracks, drainage channels, panel clips, and anchor channels.

1. Include attachment to supports, panel-to-panel joinery, panel-to-dissimilar-material

joinery, and panel-system joint seals.
2. Include attachment to supports, panel-to-panel joinery, panel-to-dissimilar-material
joinery, and panel-system joint seals.

METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 074213.23 - Page 12 of 15

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

3. Attachment systems include panel manufacturer’s flanges, clips, subgirts and splines,
track supports, rail supports, and rain-screens.
4. Install attachment systems as required to accommodate open and sealed joints at
locations indicated.
5. Provide manufacturer's standard attachment systems that provide support and complete
secondary drainage system, draining to the exterior at horizontal joints.
6. Install support system at locations, spacings, and with fasteners recommended by
manufacturer.
7. Attach metal plate wall panels interlocking components.
8. Install metal plate wall panels to allow individual panels to be installed and removed
without disturbing adjacent panels.

E. Installing Miscellaneous Steel Framing: Comply with AISC's "Specification for Structural
Steel Buildings - Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design," and install to accommodate
construction tolerances specified and as indicated on Shop Drawings.

1. Maintain erection tolerances of backup structure within AISC's "Code of Standard

Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
2. Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas immediately after erection.
a. Repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

F. Installation: Attach metal composite material wall panels to supports at locations, spacings,
and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer to achieve performance requirements
specified.

1. Wet Seal Systems: Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent metal
composite material wall panels with sealant backing and sealant. Install sealant
backing and sealant according to requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint
Sealants."
2. Dry Seal Systems: Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent metal composite
material wall panels with manufacturer's standard gasket system.
3. Rainscreen Systems: Do not apply sealants to joints unless otherwise indicated.

G. Clip Installation: Attach panel clips to supports at locations, spacings, and with fasteners
recommended by manufacturer. Attach routed-and-returned flanges of wall panels to panel
clips with manufacturer's standard fasteners.

1. Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent panels with sealant backing and
sealant. Install sealant backing and sealant according to requirements specified in
Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
2. Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent metal composite material wall
panels with manufacturer's standard gaskets.

H. Subgirt-and-Spline Installation: Install support assembly at locations, spacings, and with

fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Use manufacturer's standard subgirts and splines
that provide support and complete secondary drainage assembly, draining to the exterior at
horizontal joints. Attach metal composite material wall panels by interlocking perimeter
extrusions attached to panels with subgirts and splines. Fully engage integral subgirt-and-
spline gaskets and leave horizontal and vertical joints with open reveal. Terminate edge of
panels flush with perimeter extrusions.

1. Install wall panels to allow individual panels to "free float" and be installed and
removed without disturbing adjacent panels.
2. Do not apply sealants to joints unless otherwise indicated.

METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 074213.23 - Page 13 of 15

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

I. Track-Support Installation: Install support assembly at locations, spacings, and with fasteners
recommended by manufacturer. Use manufacturer's standard horizontal tracks and vertical
tracks that provide support and secondary drainage assembly, draining to the exterior at
horizontal joints through drain tube. Attach metal composite material wall panels to tracks
by interlocking panel edges with manufacturer's standard "T" clips.

1. Attach routed-and-returned flanges of wall panels to perimeter extrusions with

manufacturer's standard fasteners.
2. Attach flush wall panels to perimeter extrusions by engaging panel edges and by
attaching with manufacturer's standard structural silicone adhesive.
3. Install wall panels to allow individual panels to "free float" and be installed and
removed without disturbing adjacent panels.
4. Do not apply sealants to joints unless otherwise indicated.

J. Rainscreen-Principle Installation: Install using manufacturer's standard assembly with

vertical channel that provides support and secondary drainage assembly, draining at base of
wall. Notch vertical channel to receive support pins. Install vertical channels supported by
channel brackets or adjuster angles and at locations, spacings, and with fasteners
recommended by manufacturer. Attach metal composite material wall panels by inserting
horizontal support pins into notches in vertical channels and into flanges of panels. Leave
horizontal and vertical joints with open reveal.

1. Install wall panels to allow individual panels to be installed and removed without
disturbing adjacent panels.
2. Do not apply sealants to joints unless otherwise indicated.

K. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and

weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with
flashings and other components.

1. Install components required for a complete metal composite material panel assembly
including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers,
closure strips, and similar items. Provide types indicated by metal composite material
panel manufacturer; or, if not indicated, provide types recommended in writing by
metal composite material panel manufacturer.

L. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written

installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide
concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install
work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight.

1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks and that is
true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install
sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof performance.
2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
Space movement joints at a maximum of 3 m with no joints allowed within 605 mm of
corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would
not be sufficiently waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges,
not less than 25 mm deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).

METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 074213.23 - Page 14 of 15

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal composite material wall panel units within
installed tolerance of 6 mm in 6 m, non-accumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines as
indicated, and within 3-mm offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal composite
material panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation
instructions. On completion of metal composite material panel installation, clean finished
surfaces as recommended by metal composite material panel manufacturer. Maintain in a
clean condition during construction.

B. After metal composite material panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of
obstructions, dirt, and sealant.

C. Replace metal composite material panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION 074213.23

METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 074213.23 - Page 15 of 15

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

SECTION 075323 - ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Adhered EPDM membrane for inverted roofing system for areas shown on Drawings
(Towers roof, Podium roof, Piazzas and the like).
2. Roof insulation.
3. Auxiliary materials for vegetated roof assembly areas.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 03 Section "Lightweight Insulating Concrete" for cementitious screed

2. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.
3. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration
flashings, flashings, and counter flashings.
4. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint
preparation.
5. Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for roof drains.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing
and Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand
specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without
failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in
construction. Membrane roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.

B. Buildings U-Values:

1. High performing Roof, U Value= 0.25 W/m2.K.

C. General Performance: Install a free draining, watertight membrane roofing system including
upstands, flashings and coverings, with compatible components, that; will not permit the
passage of liquid water; and will withstand wind loads, thermally induced movement, and
exposure to weather without failure.

ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 075323 - Page 1 of 12

E18066-0100D-TD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

1. Roofing system is to be without patches as far as practicable. If patches are

inevitable, their number, location and size shall be as recommended and allowed by
roofing manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.

D. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another
under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

E. Roofing System Design: Provide membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that
have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift
pressure calculated according to the following:

1. Design wind loads shall follow the wind tunnel test; the latest edition of the Egyptian
local codes governing building loads, ECP 201-2013 (Chapter 7) with exposure
category “A”; latest edition of the American codes on design loads for buildings and
other structures, ASCE7 with exposure category “C”; the results of the wind tunnels
tests, whichever is more stringent. Basic wind speed is 33 m/s (3-second gust), 50
years return period.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit in compliance with Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures.”

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Submission is to be made complete and
comprising all accessories and materials needed to complete the job

1. Comply with Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

C. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other Work. Drawings are to be approved by the manufacturer before
submission to the Engineer.

1. Base flashings and membrane terminations.

2. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.

D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes:

1. Sheet roofing, of color specified, including T-shaped side and end lap seam.
2. Roof insulation.
3. Roof paver, full sized, in each color and texture required.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data:

1. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with
project name, addresses, names of Engineer and Employers, and other information
specified.
2. For Testing Agency Qualifications include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 075323 - Page 2 of 12

E18066-0100D-TD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

B. Installer Experience: List of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out
successfully by the installer with the same product endorsed by the manufacturer’s
representative.

C. Manufacturer Certificate: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that membrane roofing

system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

1. Submit evidence of complying with performance requirements.

D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by

manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency, for components of
membrane roofing system. Test report shall include manufacturer name and contacts in
addition to tested product name and detailed description.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For membrane roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.

1.8 LOCAL REGULATIONS AND CODES

A. Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, and regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.

1. Obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Comply with Egyptian Codes and Standards requirements and latest circulars.

1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Comply with Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements.”

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems

similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As
applicable, procure products from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements,
warranty requirements, and technical or factory-authorized service representative
requirements. Experience: Minimum of 10 years.

C. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm specializing in performing the work of this Section
with minimum three years documented experience and that is approved, authorized, or
licensed by the product manufacturer to install his product and that is eligible to receive
manufacturer's warranty. Include project names and addresses, names and addresses of
Engineers and Employers, and other information specified. Experience: Minimum of 5
years.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation for membrane roofing
system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or approved by membrane roofing
manufacturer.

ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 075323 - Page 3 of 12

E18066-0100D-TD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

E. Testing Agency Qualifications: An accredited, independent agency with the experience and
capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E329; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to
authorities.

F. Preliminary Roofing Conference: Before starting roof deck construction, conduct

conference at Project site.

1. Meet with Employer, Engineer, Employer's insurer if applicable, testing and

inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's
representative, deck Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects
roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including
manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,
Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
4. Review requirements for deck substrate conditions and finishes, including flatness
and fastening.
5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,
equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system.
7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if
applicable.
8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after
installation.
9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.

1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and
labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture,
approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other
components.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected
location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect
stored liquid material from direct sunlight.

1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated
shelf life.

C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent
deflection of deck.

ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 075323 - Page 4 of 12

E18066-0100D-TD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written
instructions and warranty requirements.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Comply with Division 01 Section "Warranties".

B. Warranty includes roofing membrane, base flashings, roofing membrane accessories, roof
insulation, fasteners, roof pavers, and other components of membrane roofing system.

C. Total System Warranty: Provide A 20-year Total complete system warranty in which
Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are jointly and severally responsible and agree to
repair or replace, without limitations, all or any part of the membrane roofing system which
fails or becomes defective in materials or workmanship within twenty years from date of
Substantial Completion. Failure includes, but is not limited to: water penetration,
deterioration in membranes and coatings; other than due to normal ageing and weathering;
and any defects in adhesion, sealants, flashings, fixings, coverings and other components of
the work.

1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING

A. EPDM: ASTM D 4637, Type I, non-reinforced, or Type II, scrim or fabric internally
reinforced, uniform, flexible EPDM sheet, as required by manufacturer.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:

a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.

b. Firestone Building Products.
c. GAF Materials Corporation.
d. Johns Manville.

2. Thickness: 1.50 mm, nominal for fully adhered applications.

3. Width: Provide membrane in largest sheet possible but not less than 3.0 m, un-spliced
width.
4. Exposed Face Color: Black.
5. The membrane complies with the following characteristics when tested in accordance
with ASTM Test Method:

a. Tensile strength: >= 9.0 MPa

b. Elongation, ultimate: >= 300%
c. Tear Resistance: >= 26 kN/m
d. Heat Aging:

ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 075323 - Page 5 of 12

E18066-0100D-TD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

1) Tensile Strength: >= 8.30 MPa

2) Elongation, ultimate: >= 200%
3) Tear Resistance: >= 21 kN/m

2.2 AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system

manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing.

B. Sheet Flashing: 1.5-mm- thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to application.
The flashing shall be easily formed to fit irregular shapes and surfaces and resists tearing,
flex cracking and abrasions.

C. Perimeter Securements: couples 45-mils (1.14mm) of reinforced EPDM with 35-mils of

cured EPDM laminated along one or both edges. The reinforced EPDM membrane is either
150 or 230 mm wide, and the adhesive strips are 75 mm wide tape pre-applied along one
edge for the 150 mm wide while the 230 mm wide has splice tape pre-applied to both edges.

D. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.

E. Seaming Material: Manufacturer's standard, synthetic-rubber polymer primer and 75-mm-

wide minimum, butyl splice tape with release film.

F. Lap Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, single-component sealant.

G. Water Cutoff Mastic: Manufacturer's standard butyl mastic sealant.

H. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled aluminum bars, approximately

25 by 3 mm thick; with anchors.

I. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel

sheet, approximately 25 mm wide by 1.3 mm thick, prepunched.

J. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with
corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening membrane to
substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

K. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet
flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, reinforced EPDM
securement strips, T-joint covers, in-seam sealants, termination reglets, cover strips, and
other accessories, all from the manufacturer of the roofing system or as approved by him.

L. Polyethylene Film: ASTM D 4397, 0.15 mm thick, minimum, with maximum permeance
rating of 0.13 perm (7.5 ng/Pa x s x sq. m).

1. Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer

for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.

2.3 ROOF INSULATION

A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by EPDM membrane

roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application,
of thicknesses indicated.

ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 075323 - Page 6 of 12

E18066-0100D-TD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

B. Extruded-Polystyrene: Rigid cellular polystyrene Board Insulation with closed cells to

ASTM C 578, square edged, properties as follows:

1. ASTM C 578-95, Type VII: 414 kPa, 35 kg/ m3 / [60 psi, 2.2 lbs/ft3.], minimum.
2. Thickness: 100 mm, minimum.
3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the manufacturers specified.

a. Dow Chemical Company.

b. Advechems.
c. Owens Corning.

C. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where
indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.

2.4 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for

intended use and compatibility with membrane roofing.

B. Protection Fabric (For installation above insulation): polypropylene non-woven needle-

punched fabric which is stabilized to resist soil chemicals, mildew, insects and is non-
biodegradable. Available in rolls 3.81ms in width by 61 ms in length 12 oz/yd2.

C. Cover board: Provide a rigid, roof insulation panel composed of a cement board designed
for use as a cover board.

2.5 AGGREGATE BALLAST

A. Aggregate Ballast: Provide aggregate ballast that will withstand weather exposure without
significant deterioration and will not contribute to membrane degradation, of the following
type and size:

1. Aggregate Type: Smooth, washed, riverbed gravel or other acceptable smooth-faced

stone.
2. Size: ASTM D 448, Size 3, ranging in size from 25 to 50 mm.

2.6 ROOF PAVERS

A. Lightweight Roof Pavers: Interlocking, lightweight concrete units, specially factory cast for
use as roof ballast; grooved back, with four-way drainage capability; beveled, doweled, or
otherwise profiled; and as follows:

1. Size: 400 x 400 x 50 mm unless otherwise indicated.

2. Compressive Strength: 20 MPa, minimum.
3. Colors and Textures: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.

B. Rubber Paver Supports: Proprietary adjustable roof paver supports to provide clear height as
indicated on Drawings or approved shop drawings. Provide circular type of base area that
produces compression strength within allowable limits of compression of the insulation.

ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 075323 - Page 7 of 12

E18066-0100D-TD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

Provide protruding ribs on top surface for dividing surface into four quarters and accurately
retain each paver in place with suitable gap width to allow passage of water.

2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS FOR VEGETATED ROOF ASSEMBLY AREAS

A. General: Refer to Landscape Specifications for Sections related to the work of vegetated
roofs and the requirements of this Section.

B. Waterproofing Membrane and Thermal Insulation: As specified in this Section.

C. Moisture-Retention Mat: Assembly manufacturer's standard water-retaining fabric

manufactured from synthetic fibers.

D. Drainage Panels: Assembly manufacturer's standard drainage board formed from geotextile-
faced, molded-plastic sheet with a geotextile face and "cups" of the molded sheet facing
upward like small reservoirs to retain water while allowing excess water to drain away
below the board.

E. Root Barrier: Vegetated roof assembly manufacturer's standard plastic sheet manufactured
from polyethylene or polypropylene plastic; formulated to resist root growth and bacteria.

F. Erosion-Control Fabric: Vegetated roof assembly manufacturer's standard erosion-control

fabric.

G. Protection Board: ASTM D 6506, semirigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral-reinforced-

asphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt-saturated fibrous liners; 6-mm
nominal thickness or as recommended by roofing-membrane manufacturer.

H. Access Boxes: Manufacturer's standard stainless-steel or aluminum boxes with removable,

rigid covers for accessing drains, valves, and switches beneath the finish elevation of
growing medium; secure each cover with four noncorrosive screws.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the
following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced
and that roof drain bodies are securely clamped in place.
2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at
penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.
3. Verify that minimum concrete drying period recommended by roofing system
manufacturer has passed.
4. Verify that concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary
moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
5. Verify that concrete curing compounds that will impair adhesion of roofing
components to roof deck have been removed.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 075323 - Page 8 of 12

E18066-0100D-TD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing
installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp
projections.

B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling
or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is
taking place or when rain is forecast.

C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water
from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain
is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining
roofing.

3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to

precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.

B. Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions
for installing roof insulation.

C. Where overall insulation thickness is 68 mm or greater, install two or more layers with
joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 150
mm in each direction.

D. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and
does not restrict flow of water.

E. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints
staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 6
mm with insulation.

1. Cut and fit insulation within 6 mm of nailers, projections, and penetrations.

F. Loosely Laid Insulation: Loosely lay insulation units over substrate.

3.4 ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Adhere membrane roofing over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing
system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll membrane roofing and allow to relax
before installing.

B. Start installation of membrane roofing in presence of membrane roofing system

manufacturer's technical personnel.

C. Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum
dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.

D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of membrane roofing at rate required
by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing membrane roofing. Do not
apply to splice area of membrane roofing.

ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 075323 - Page 9 of 12

E18066-0100D-TD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

E. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten membrane roofing securely at terminations,

penetrations, and perimeters.

F. Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.

G. Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape, and
firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping membrane roofing according to manufacturer's
written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal
exposed edges of membrane roofing terminations.

H. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements.

I. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at roof drains and securely seal
membrane roofing in place with clamping ring.

3.5 ROOF COVERING INSTALLATION

A. Roof Covering:

1. Fixed Pavers: Install roof-covering using cement-sand mortar thick wet bedding on
top of the protection layer specified. Mortar is to consist from 250 kg ordinary
Portland cement to 1 m3 of grade sand with addition of chemical admixture to replace
the effect of lime, but do not use lime. Provide 10-mm wide sealant-filled movement
joints in both directions at intervals recommended by manufacturer.

a. Clean joints promptly from grey mortar residuals. Aerate for 24 hours. Grout
roof flooring with white cement-grout consisting of white cement mixed with
water.

2. Loosely Laid Pavers: Install rubber roof-paver supports according to manufacturer's

written instructions, in locations indicated.

a. Install perimeter paver edge securement.

B. Aggregate Ballast: Apply aggregate ballast uniformly over protection mat at roofing system
manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than the following, spreading with care to
minimize possibility of damage to roofing membrane. Leave roof insulation ballasted at the
end of the workday.

1. Ballast Weight: Size 4 aggregate, 50 kg/sq. m.

3.6 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according
to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and
allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.

C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet
flashing.

ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 075323 - Page 10 of 12

E18066-0100D-TD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

D. Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping
sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of
sheet flashing terminations.

E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through
termination bars.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Engineer shall perform inspections.

B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to
inspect roofing installation on completion.

C. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections
indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

D. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance

of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

E. Flood Testing: Flood test each deck area for leaks, according to recommendations in
ASTM D 5957, after completing waterproofing but before overlying construction is placed.
Install temporary containment assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with potable water.

1. Notify the Engineer 48 hours in advance of the date and time of each test.
2. Subject to the Engineer’s approval, divide large roof areas into sections with
approved barriers.
3. Externally cover and seal all roof outlets and protect against damage from water
pressure with temporary curbs.
4. Flood segmented area with potable water to achieve a minimum cover of 25 mm and
not to exceed a maximum depth of 100 mm at low point of test area. Do not exceed
65 mm for mean water depth. Hoses used to flood the test area should be located
away from laps in the membrane and the water aimed to flow with the laps and not
against the lap’s edges.
5. Maintain water in the test area so as not to exceed a minimum level of 50 mm below
the top edge of flashings.
6. Measure water at beginning and end of the test period
7. Maintain test for 48 hours. Monitor water level and inspect for leaks at regular
intervals.
8. Do not perform continuous flood testing over a weekend unless persons are present to
monitor the test.
9. Should rain occur during the test period, discontinue testing to avoid flooding over
the edge of the flashings. The addition of rain water to the test area may render the
measurements of draw-down or added water inaccurate.
10. On completion of test, slowly drain roof area, ensuring that outlets do not overload or
flood.
11. Where leaks have occurred, submit detailed proposals and obtain approval for
remedial measures.
12. After completion of remedial works, retest the affected roof areas.

F. Engineer to observe testing and examine underside of decks and terminations for evidence
of leaks during flood testing.

ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 075323 - Page 11 of 12

E18066-0100D-TD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

3.8 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction
period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing
for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies
to Engineer and Employer.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with
requirements, repair substrates and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a
condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according
to warranty requirements.

END OF SECTION 075323

ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 075323 - Page 12 of 12

E18066-0100D-TD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Formed sheet metal flashing fabrications.

2. Other metal flashing and trim as shown on Drawings.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.
2. Division 07 Section "Ethylene-Propylene-Diene-Monomer (EPDM) Roofing" for
installing sheet metal flashing and trim integral with membrane roofing.
3. Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports,
roof hatches, vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind loads,
structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure
due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain
watertight.

B. Fabricate and install roof edge flashing capable of resisting uplift pressures calculated
according to wind loads specified in Division 7 Section "Ethylene-Propylene-Diene-
Monomer (EPDM) Roofing".

C. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal
movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.

1. Temperature Change (Range): Uniform ± 30 deg C and ± 5 deg C temperature

gradient.

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - Page 1 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit in compliance with Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures.”

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each
manufactured product and accessory.

1. Comply with Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim,
including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish
between shop- and field-assembled work.

1. Identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in
Project.
2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams,
and dimensions.
3. Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including
layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.
4. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points.
5. Details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing direction
of expansion and contraction.
6. Details of special conditions.
7. Details of connections to adjoining work.
8. Detail formed flashing and trim at a scale of not less than 1:10.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of
size indicated below:

1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 300 mm long by actual width of unit, including finished seam
and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other
attachments.
2. Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous
Fabrications: 300 mm long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other
exposed accessories.
3. Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full-size Sample.

E. Qualification Data:

1. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with
project name, addresses, names of Engineer and Employers, and other information
specified.

F. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessories to include in maintenance
manuals.

1.5 LOCAL REGULATIONS AND CODES

A. Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, and regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.

1. Obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - Page 2 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2. Comply with Egyptian Codes and Standards requirements and latest circulars.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Comply with Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements.”

B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet
metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a
record of successful in-service performance.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that
might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim
materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to
sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal
flashing and trim installation.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Comply with Division 01 Section "Warranties".

B. Special Warranty: Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and
Contractor are jointly and severally responsible and to replace sheet metal flashing and trim
that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by
applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209M, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required,
with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required.

1. Surface: Smooth, flat.

2. Exposed Finish: Three-Coat Fluoropolymer Finish as specified for aluminum works.
3. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
4. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic
or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum
total dry film thickness of 0.013 mm.

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - Page 3 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 316, dead soft, fully annealed; with
smooth, flat surface.

1. Finish: Unless otherwise indicated finish shall be according to ASTM A480/A480M,

No. 4 (polished directional satin).

a. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into
finish.

2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Polyethylene Sheet: 0.15-mm thick polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings,
separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal
flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal
unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and
bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by
manufacturer of primary sheet metal.

1. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.

2. Fasteners for Stainless Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.

C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound

sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic,
nonstaining tape 13 mm wide and 3 mm thick.

D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; low

modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal
flashing and trim and remain watertight.

E. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound,

recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted
joints.

F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

G. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for
application.

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. General: Custom fabricates sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details indicated
on Drawings. Shops fabricate items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for
accurate fit before shop fabrication.

1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with
performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and
metal.

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - Page 4 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.

3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form
hems.
4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are
not allowed on faces exposed to view.

B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of
installation to a tolerance of 6 mm in 6 m on slope and location lines as indicated and within
3-mm offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

C. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric
sealant.

D. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion
joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 25 mm deep, filled with butyl sealant
concealed within joints.

E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or
from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with
elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended
use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.

2.5 SHEET METAL FLASHING FABRICATIONS

A. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to form the shapes and dimension shown on
Drawings and shop drawings approved by Engineer as necessary to close and seal the
external facades and other applications shown on Drawings.

1. Material: Aluminum sheet, 0.90 mm thick.

2. Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer finish.
3. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.

2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
anchored.

B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of the Work.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - Page 5 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Install underlayment as indicated on Drawings.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely
in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder,
welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as
required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide
uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight
performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before
fabricating sheet metal.
3. Space cleats not more than 300 mm apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners.
Bend tabs over fasteners.
4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling,
and tool marks.
5. Install sealant tape where indicated.
6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
7. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by
other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA.

1. Coat back side of uncoated aluminum and stainless steel sheet metal flashing and trim
with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or
cementitious construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood
substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a
course of polyethylene sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at a maximum of 3 m with no joints allowed within 600 mm of corner or
intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be
sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than
25 mm deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate not less than 32 mm for nails and
not less than 19 mm for wood screws.

E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction.

1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less
than 25 mm into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient
temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 4 and 21 deg C, set joint
members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for
installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at
temperatures below 4 deg C.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants."

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - Page 6 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

F. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for
strength.

3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed
tolerance of 6 mm in 6 m on slope and location lines as indicated and within 3-mm offset of
adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.

B. Clean off excess sealants.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and
trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation
instructions. On completion of installation, remove unused materials and clean finished
surfaces. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated
beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION 076200

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - Page 7 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

SECTION 077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Fasciae.
2. Gutters and downspouts.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-fabricated
metal flashing and counterflashing, scuppers, gutters and downspouts, trim and fascia
units, roof expansion-joint covers, and miscellaneous sheet metal accessories.
2. Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for manufactured curbs, roof hatches, gravity
ventilators, penthouse ventilators, ridge vents, and smoke vents. Roof accessories
installed integrally with roofing membrane are specified in roofing system Sections as
roofing work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit in compliance with Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures.”

B. Product Data: For each type of product specified. Include details of construction relative to
materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout, joining, profiles, accessories, anchorage, flashing

connections, and relationship to supporting structure and to adjoining roof and wall
construction.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's sample finishes showing the full range of
colors and textures available for units with factory-applied color finishes.

E. Samples for Verification: Of the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes,

showing the full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Prepare Samples
from the same material to be used for the Work. Furnish straight Samples in lengths
specified below or where corner pieces are required for Project; furnish corner Samples with
each leg in lengths specified below:

1. Fasciae: 200-mm- long sections of each distinctly different fascia component,

including scuppers and extenders (if any), exposed as finish work.
2. Gutters and Downspouts: 200 mm long, including liners, screens, straps, hangers, and
other support and attachment devices.

ROOF SPECIALTIES 077100 - Page 1 of 6

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Provide manufactured roof specialties capable of withstanding wind loads,

structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without
failing.

B. Provide manufactured roofing specialties, incorporating roof edge treatment that complies
with recommendations of FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for the following::

C. Design wind loads shall follow the wind tunnel test; the latest edition of the Egyptian local
codes governing building loads, ECP 201-2013 (Chapter 7) with exposure category “A”;
latest edition of the American codes on design loads for buildings and other structures,
ASCE7 with exposure category “C”; the results of the wind tunnels tests, whichever is more
stringent. Basic wind speed is 33 m/s (3-second gust), 50 years return period.

D. Seismic Loads: Design as per ECP 201-2013 considering the following:

1. PGA=0.15g, Importance factor =1.0, R for the tower = 5.0., Soil class= B, Service
seismic interstory allowable drift = 0.01.

1.5 LOCAL REGULATIONS AND CODES

A. Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, and regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.

1. Obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Comply with Egyptian Codes and Standards requirements and latest circulars.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Comply with Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements.”

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of manufactured roof specialty from one source and
by a single manufacturer.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Coordinate work of this Section with adjoining work for proper sequencing of each
installation to ensure best-possible weather resistance and protection of materials and
finishes against damage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221M, 6063-T5 alloy and temper, or as recommended by

manufacturer for use intended and as required for proper application of finish indicated.

ROOF SPECIALTIES 077100 - Page 2 of 6

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209M, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer
and finisher for use intended and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and
durability of alloy and temper designated below:

1. Alloy 3003-H14, with a minimum thickness of 1.0 mm, unless otherwise indicated,
for aluminum sheet with mill finish.
2. Alloy 5005-H14, with a minimum thickness of 1.2 mm, for aluminum sheet with
other than mill finish.

C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: ASTM A 653M, Z275 coating designation; commercial quality; at
least 0.85 mm thick, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Coil-Coated Galvanized Steel Sheet: Galvanized steel sheet prepainted by coil-coating

process with indicated coating complying with ASTM A 755M.

2.2 FASCIAE

A. Provide fasciae in shapes and sizes indicated, with shop-mitered and -welded corners.
Include water dams formed from at least 0.7-mm- thick, galvanized steel sheet; anchor
plates; cleats or other attachment devices; concealed splice plates; and trim and other
accessories indicated or required for complete installation, with no exposed fasteners.

B. Scuppers: Provide scuppers designed and manufactured for use with fasciae and of the same
material.

1. Additional Features: Overflow scupper with prefabricated core.

2. Additional Features: Spill-out scupper with prefabricated core.
3. Additional Features: Downspout scupper with downspout adapter.

C. Provide exposed fascia components fabricated from the following metal:

1. Formed-aluminum sheet in thickness indicated, but not less than the following:

a. Thickness: 0.8 mm.

2.3 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS

A. Provide gutters and downspouts in shapes and sizes indicated, with mitered and welded
corners. Include steel straps formed from at least 0.7-mm- thick, galvanized steel sheet;
hangers or other attachment devices; screens; end plates; and trim and other accessories
indicated or required for complete installation.

B. Additional Features: Provide items below fabricated from the same metal as gutters and
downspouts.

1. Downspout starters (fascia sump) with downspout starter hole.

2. Flow-through gravel stop with perforated vertical leg.
3. Leaf guard with hold-down clips.

C. Provide gutters and downspouts fabricated from the following metal:

1. Coil-coated galvanized steel sheet in thickness indicated, but not less than the
following:

ROOF SPECIALTIES 077100 - Page 3 of 6

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

a. Thickness: 0.85 mm.

2. Stainless-Steel Sheet: 2.00 mm thick.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessories designed and manufactured to match

and fit roof edge treatment system indicated.

B. Exposed Fasteners: Stainless steel, nonmagnetic, of manufacturer's standard type and size
for product and application indicated. Match finish of exposed heads with material being
fastened.

C. Concealed Fasteners: Same metal as item fastened or other noncorrosive metal as

recommended by manufacturer.

D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,

complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

E. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type asphalt mastic, nominally free of sulfur and
containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 0.4-mm dry film thickness per coat.

F. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating

sealant.

G. Foam-Rubber Seal: Manufacturer's standard foam.

H. Adhesives: Type recommended by manufacturer for substrate and project conditions, and
formulated to withstand minimum 2.9-kPa wind-uplift force.

2.5 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipment.

C. Finish manufactured roof specialties after fabrication and assembly if products are not
fabricated from prefinished metals.

D. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are

acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable
variations in the same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of other components
are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or
installed to minimize contrast.

2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum

Association for designating aluminum finishes.

ROOF SPECIALTIES 077100 - Page 4 of 6

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

B. High-Performance Organic Coating Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned

with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion
coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to
exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating or resin manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Fluoropolymer 3-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard 3-coat, thermocured

system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer, fluoropolymer color coat,
and clear fluoropolymer topcoat, with both color coat and clear topcoat containing not
less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with
AAMA 1402, Test Method 7.

a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range of

colors and glosses.

2.7 COIL-COATED GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET FINISHES

A. General: Apply high-performance fluoropolymer coating, complying with ASTM A 755M

process, in thickness indicated, on galvanized steel sheet as recommended by coating
manufacturer and applicator. Furnish appropriate air-drying spray finish in matching color
for touchup.

B. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system

composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat
containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; with a total
minimum dry film thickness of 0.023 mm and 30 percent reflective gloss when tested
according to ASTM D 523.

1. Durability: Provide coating field tested under normal range of weather conditions for
a minimum of 20 years without significant peel, blister, flake, chip, crack, or check in
finish; without chalking in excess of a chalk rating of 8 according to ASTM D 4214;
and without fading in excess of 5 Hunter units.

a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range of

colors and glosses.

2.8 GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are
free of oil and other contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized steel sheet
fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.

B. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is indicated,
apply the air-dried primer specified below immediately after cleaning and pretreating.

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range of colors
and glosses.

C. Polyurethane Colored Exterior Coating: Factory applied paint system obtained from single
supplier consisting high build polyurethane colored exterior coating over an anti-corrosive
pigmented primer and a barrier coat on both sides. Color of polyurethane coating applied is
to be selected by the Engineer from manufacturer’s full range of colors and gloss.

ROOF SPECIALTIES 077100 - Page 5 of 6

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine walls, roof edges, and parapets for suitable conditions for roof edge system
installation. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Promptly remove protective film, if any, from exposed surfaces of finished metals. Strip
with care to avoid damage to finish.

B. Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and similar surfaces to receive
roof edge system specified. Install blocking, cleats, water dams, and other anchoring and
attachment accessories and devices required.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Coordinate with

installation of roof deck and other substrates to receive work of this Section and with vapor
retarders, roofing insulation, roofing membrane, flashing, and wall construction, as required
to ensure that each element of the Work performs properly and that combined elements are
waterproof and weathertight. Anchor products securely to structural substrates to withstand
lateral and thermal stresses and inward and outward loading pressures.

B. Isolation: Where metal surfaces of units contact dissimilar metal or corrosive substrates,
including wood, apply bituminous coating on concealed metal surfaces or provide other
permanent separation as recommended by aluminum producer.

C. Expansion Provisions: Install running lengths to allow controlled expansion for movement
of metal components in relation not only to one another but also to adjoining dissimilar
materials, including flashing and roofing membrane materials, in a manner sufficient to
prevent water leakage, deformation, or damage.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up

damaged metal coatings.

B. Protection: Provide protective measures as required to ensure work of this Section will be
without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 077100

ROOF SPECIALTIES 077100 - Page 6 of 6

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

SECTION 077129 - MANUFACTURED ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Aluminum roof expansion joint assemblies.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wooden curbs for mounting roof expansion
assemblies.
2. Division 07 Section "Ethylene-Propylene-Diene-Monomer (EPDM) Roofing".
3. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-fabricated
sheet metal expansion joint systems, flashing, and other sheet metal items.
4. Division 07 Section "Expansion Control" for expansion joint covers in construction
other than roofs.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Provide roof expansion joint assemblies that, when installed, remain watertight
within movement limitations specified by manufacturer.

B. Design wind loads shall follow the wind tunnel test; the latest edition of the Egyptian local
codes governing building loads, ECP 201-2013 (Chapter 7) with exposure category “A”; latest
edition of the American codes on design loads for buildings and other structures, ASCE7 with
exposure category “C”; the results of the wind tunnels tests, whichever is more stringent.
Basic wind speed is 33 m/s (3-second gust), 50 years return period.

C. Seismic Loads: Design as per ECP 201-2013 considering the following:

1. PGA=0.15g, Importance factor =1.0, R for the tower = 5.0., Soil class= B, Service
seismic interstory allowable drift = 0.01.Equipment Loads: Allow for loads due to
cleaning and maintenance equipment.

MANUFACTURED ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS 077129 - Page 1 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

MANUFACTURED ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS 077129 - Page 2 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit in compliance with Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures.”

B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's product specifications, construction details, material

and finish descriptions, installation instructions, and dimensions of individual components.

1. Comply with Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, joints, splices, locations of joints
and splices, anchorage details, intersections, transitions, fittings, and attachments to other
Work. Where joint assemblies change planes, provide isometric drawings depicting how
components interconnect to achieve continuity.

D. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

E. Qualification Data:

1. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with
project name, addresses, names of Engineer and Employers, and other information
specified.
2. For Testing Agency Qualifications include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for current products. Test report shall include manufacturer name and contacts
in addition to tested product name and detailed description.

1.5 LOCAL REGULATIONS AND CODES

A. Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, and regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.

1. Obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Comply with Egyptian Codes and Standards requirements and latest circulars.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Comply with Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements.”

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems

similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As
applicable, procure products from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements,
warranty requirements, and technical or factory-authorized service representative
requirements. Experience: Minimum of 10 years.

C. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed installation of roof

expansion joint assemblies similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this
Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service
performance.

MANUFACTURED ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS 077129 - Page 3 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

D. Source Limitations: Obtain manufactured roof expansion joints through one source from a
single manufacturer.

E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fire-barrier assemblies with fire-test-response

characteristics not less than that of adjacent construction, as determined by testing identical
products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to Engineer. Assemblies shall be capable of anticipated movement while
maintaining fire rating. Identify assemblies with appropriate markings of applicable testing
and inspecting agency.

1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: UL 2079.

2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.

F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An accredited, independent agency with the experience and
capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E329; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to
authorities.

G. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockups as directed by Engineer.

2. Build mockups for each form and finish of expansion control not less than 600 mm in
length.
3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.

1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate delivery and installation of expansion joint assemblies to prevent damage and
provide timely integration of units with roofing membranes and flashing.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Comply with Division 01 Section "Warranties".

B. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Employer of
other rights Employer may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall
be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.

C. Special Warranty: Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and
Contractor are jointly and severally agreeing to repair or replace roof expansion assemblies
that leak, deteriorate in excess of rates specified in manufacturer's published product
literature, or otherwise fail to perform within specified warranty period.

D. Warranty Period: Five years after date of Substantial Completion.

MANUFACTURED ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS 077129 - Page 4 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Construction Specialties, Inc.

2. JointMaster/InPro Corporation.
3. Nystrom, Inc.
4. Balco, Inc.

2.2 SHEET METALS

A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, hot-dip zinc-coating designation Z275,
stretcher-leveled standard of flatness and either commercial steel or forming steel, minimum
0.5 mm thick.

B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B 209M alloy 3003-H14, 5052-H32, or 6061-T6, mill finish,
minimum 0.8 mm thick.

C. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221M alloy 6063-T5 or 6063-T52, mill finish, minimum 1.0
mm thick.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Roof Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II.

B. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: ASTM C 665.

C. Flexible Cellular Sponge or Expanded Rubber: ASTM D 1056.

D. Silicone Extrusions: Classified according to ASTM D 2000, 4GE, 709, UV stabilized and
does not propagate flame.

2.4 FIRE BARRIERS

A. Fire Barriers: Devices complying with requirements specified in "Quality Assurance" Article
for fire-test-response characteristics and designed for dynamic structural movement without
material degradation or fatigue when tested according to ASTM E 1399. Provide joint
systems with manufacturer's continuous, standard, flexible fire-barrier seals in back of joint
system at locations indicated to provide fire-resistance rating not less than rating of adjacent
construction.

MANUFACTURED ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS 077129 - Page 5 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2.5 ROOF EXPANSION JOINT ASSEMBLIES

A. General: Provide above-deck assemblies consisting of aluminum base member with sloped
cants and provisions for anchoring and sealing to roofing membrane or flashing in a
waterproof-sealed joint. Provide free-to-move, extruded-aluminum cover plate anchored
against displacement and waterproofed by integral seals. Provide prefabricated units for
corner and joint intersections and horizontal and vertical transitions, including those to other
building expansion joints, splicing units, adhesives, coatings, and other components as
recommended by joint unit manufacturer for complete installation. Fabricate assemblies
specifically for curb-to-curb and curb-to-wall applications.

1. Base Frame: Extruded aluminum with mill finish.

2. Covers Less Than 375 mm Wide: Minimum 2.0-mm- thick, extruded aluminum with
mill finish.
3. Covers 375 mm Wide and Greater: Minimum 3-mm- thick, extruded aluminum with
mill finish.
4. Moisture Barrier: Manufacturer's standard.
5. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling and installing roof expansion
assemblies and materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

B. Coordinate installation of roof expansion joint assembly materials and associated work so
complete assemblies comply with assembly performance requirements.

C. Install fire barriers to provide continuous, uninterrupted fire resistance throughout length of
roof expansion joint, including transitions and end joints.

D. Extend roof expansion joint assemblies over curbs, parapets, cornices, gutters, and other
elements in the construction profile, with factory-fabricated transitions to provide continuous,
uninterrupted, waterproof roof expansion assemblies.

1. Install factory-fabricated transitions between roof expansion joint assemblies and

building expansion joint cover assemblies, specified in Division 7 Section "Expansion
Control," to provide continuous, uninterrupted, watertight construction.

E. Splice roof expansion joint assemblies with materials provided by roof expansion assembly
manufacturer for this purpose, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to provide
continuous, uninterrupted, waterproof roof expansion assemblies.

F. Provide uniform profile of expansion joint assembly throughout length of each installation;
do not stretch polymeric sheets.

G. Install mineral-fiber blanket insulation to fill joint space within joint and moisture barrier.

H. Bed anchorage flanges in cement or sealant recommended by manufacturer and securely nail
to curbs and cant strips as recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 150 mm o.c.

MANUFACTURED ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS 077129 - Page 6 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

I. Anchor roof expansion joint assemblies in the manner indicated, complying with
manufacturer's written instructions.

J. On single-ply roofing, install roof expansion joint assemblies in the manner indicated,
complying with manufacturer's instructions. Anchor to cants or curbs and seal to membrane
with sealant compatible with roofing membrane and expansion joint assembly. Cover flanges
with stripping or flashing and install according to requirements in Division 7 Section
"Ethylene-Propylene-Diene-Monomer (EPDM) Roofing."

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensures roof expansion joint assemblies are without damage or deterioration at
time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 077129

MANUFACTURED ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS 077129 - Page 7 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Roof hatches.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for metal vertical ladders, ships' ladders,
and stairs for access to roof hatches.
2. Division 05 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for safety railing system not attached to
roof hatch curbs.
3. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for roof sheathing, wood cants, and wood
nailers.
4. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-fabricated
metal flashing and counterflashing, roof expansion-joint covers, and miscellaneous
sheet metal trim and accessories.
5. Division 07 Section "Roof Specialties".

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit in compliance with Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures.”

B. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction details,
material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

1. Comply with Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roof accessories. Show
layouts of roof accessories including plans and elevations. Indicate dimensions, weights,
loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, and components. Include plans,
elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

D. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and
roof-mounted items. Show the following:

1. Size and location of roof accessories specified in this Section.

2. Method of attaching roof accessories to roof or building structure.
3. Other roof-mounted items including mechanical and electrical equipment, ductwork,
piping, and conduit.

ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - Page 1 of 6

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

E. Samples: For each type of exposed factory-applied color finish required and for each type
of roof accessory indicated, prepared on Samples of size to adequately show color.

F. Qualification Data:

1. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with
project name, addresses, names of Engineer and Employers, and other information
specified.

G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

1.4 LOCAL REGULATIONS AND CODES

A. Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, and regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.

1. Obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Comply with Egyptian Codes and Standards requirements and latest circulars.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Comply with Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements.”

B. Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"
details for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of
roofing indicated.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems

similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As
applicable, procure products from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements,
warranty requirements, and technical or factory-authorized service representative
requirements. Experience: Minimum of 10 years.

D. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm specializing in performing the work of this Section
with minimum three years documented experience and that is approved, authorized, or
licensed by the product manufacturer to install his product and that is eligible to receive
manufacturer's warranty. Include project names and addresses, names and addresses of
engineers and employers, and other information specified.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Pack, handle, and ship roof accessories properly labeled in heavy-duty packaging to prevent
damage.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify required openings for each type of roof accessory by field
measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - Page 2 of 6

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base
flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight,
secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1. With Engineer's approval, adjust location of roof accessories that would interrupt roof
drainage routes or roof expansion joints.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Comply with Division 01 Section "Warranties".

B. Special Warranty: Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and
Contractor are jointly and severally responsible and to replace roof accessories work item
that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

2. Warranty period for Finishes: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion for super
durable polyester powder coating.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209M, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type
of use and finish.

1. Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: Cleaned with inhibited

chemicals; Chemical Finish: Acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating;
Organic Coating: As specified below). Apply baked enamel complying with paint
manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting.

a. Organic Coating: Thermosetting, modified-acrylic enamel primer/topcoat

system complying with AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film
thickness of 0.04 mm, medium gloss.
b. Color and Gloss: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.

B. Aluminum Extrusions and Tubes: ASTM B 221M, alloy and temper recommended by
manufacturer for type of use, mill finished.

C. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip galvanized to comply with

ASTM A 123/A 123M, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube, baked-enamel finished.

E. Galvanized Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube, hot-dip galvanized to comply with
ASTM A 123/A 123M.

F. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M.

ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - Page 3 of 6

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 726, 25 mm thick.

B. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for
aboveground use, complying with AWPA C2; not less than 38 mm thick.

C. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 0.4-mm
dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos
fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

D. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other
noncorrosive metal as recommended by roof accessory manufacturer. Match finish of
exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener
heads to exterior exposed fasteners.

E. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, or PVC;

or flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.

F. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, polyurethane sealant; of type, grade, class, and use
classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

G. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant,

polyisobutylene plasticized, and heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
movement.

H. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, nonasbestos, fibrated asphalt cement designed for

2.3 ROOF HATCHES

A. Roof Hatches: Fabricate roof hatches with insulated double-wall lids and insulated single-
wall curb frame with integral deck mounting flange and lid frame counterflashing.
Fabricate with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints. Provide
continuous weathertight perimeter gasketing and equip with corrosion-resistant or hot-dip
galvanized hardware.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but
are not limited to, the following:

a. Nystrom, Inc.
b. Bilco Company.

2. Loads: Fabricate roof hatches to withstand 1.9-kPa external and 0.95-kPa internal
loads.
3. Type and Size: Single-leaf, as shown on Drawings.
4. Curb and Lid Material: Aluminum sheet, 2.20 mm thick.
5. Frame: 6.35 mm aluminum channel frame.
6. Insulation: Glass-fiber board.
7. Interior Lid Liner: Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as
outer metal lid.
8. Exterior Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish
as metal curb.
9. Fabricate units to minimum height of 300 mm, unless otherwise indicated.

ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - Page 4 of 6

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

10. Hardware: Spring operators, hold-open arm, stainless steel spring latch with turn
handles, butt- or pintle-type hinge system, and padlock hasps inside and outside.

a. Provide two-point latch on lids larger than 2130 mm.

2.4 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are

acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable
variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other
components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are
assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.

B. Super Durable Polyester Powder Coating (PE-SDF) for galvanized steel and aluminum alloy
components is to be approved type to meet the requirements of AAMA 2604 consisting of
powder particles of Isophthalic acid based resinous material and additives to improve
performance. Coating shall pass Qualicoat class 2 standard and shall pass 5 years Florida
test (45˚ south). Provide certificates to prove test results. The coating is to be
electrostatically sprayed on the object to produce produces a hard, durable coating:

1. Qualicoat Class: 2.
2. Florida Test Exposure: 5 years.
3. Minimum Thickness: 60 microns.
4. Surface finish: Satin.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
anchored and is ready to receive roof accessories.
2. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - Page 5 of 6

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor

roof accessories securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified. Use fasteners,
separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for completing roof
accessory installation. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing,
rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement.

B. Install roof accessories to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by
other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof accessories with bituminous coating
where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
2. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by roof accessory
manufacturers for waterproof performance.

D. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in
alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.

E. Roof Hatch Installation:

1. Check roof hatch for proper operation. Adjust operating mechanism as required.
Clean and lubricate joints and hardware.

F. Seal joints with sealant as required by manufacturer of roof accessories.

3.3 TOUCH UP

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION 077200

ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - Page 6 of 6

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

SECTION 078100 - APPLIED FIREPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Sprayed fire-resistive materials (SFRM).

a. Corrosion resistant protection priming coat that shall be applied to structural

steel surfaces prior to application of the sprayed fire resistive material.
b. Fire resistance protection to any steel surfaces that are protected above or
behind other finish work assemblies similar to furred ceilings, suspended
ceilings, and partitions or lining or applied on exposed steel in back of house
spaces.
c. Other applications as indicated on Drawings where the fire protection material
will be concealed.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing" for surface conditions required for
structural steel receiving SFRM.
2. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation"
3. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for fire-resistance-rated firestopping
systems.
4. Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for fire-resistance-rated joint
systems.
5. Division 07 Section "Intumescent Mastic Fireproofing".

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. SFRM: Sprayed fire-resistive material.

B. Concealed: Fire-resistive materials applied to surfaces that are concealed from view behind
other construction when the Work is completed and have not been defined as exposed.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-resistive requirements for building systems and components shall be as shown in Fire
Zoning Drawings and Fire Report.

APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - Page 1 of 13

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit in compliance with Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures.”

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1. Comply with Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

C. Shop Drawings: Structural framing plans indicating the following:

1. Locations and types of surface preparations required before applying SFRM.

2. Extent of SFRM for each construction and fire-resistance rating, including the
following:

a. Applicable fire-resistance design designations of a qualified testing and

inspecting agency acceptable to Engineer / authorities having jurisdiction.
b. Minimum thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-resistance ratings of
structural components and assemblies.

3. Treatment of SFRM after application.

D. Product Certificates: For each type of SFRM, signed by product manufacturer.

E. Qualification Data:

1. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with
project name, addresses, names of Engineer and Employers, and other information
specified.
2. For Testing Agency Qualifications include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

F. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From SFRM manufacturer indicating the
following:

1. Materials have been tested for bond with substrates.

2. Materials have been verified by SFRM manufacturer to be compatible with substrate
primers and coatings.
3. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.

G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for proposed SFRM. Test report shall include manufacturer name and
contacts in addition to tested product name and detailed description.

H. Field quality-control test and special inspection reports.

I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

1.6 LOCAL REGULATIONS AND CODES

A. Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, and regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.

1. Obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - Page 2 of 13

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2. Comply with Egyptian Codes and Standards requirements and latest circulars.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Comply with Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements.”

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems

similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As
applicable, procure products from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements,
warranty requirements, and technical or factory-authorized service representative
requirements. Experience: Minimum of 10 years.

C. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by

SFRM manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's
products according to specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its
SFRM to Contractor or to an installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer
qualification on the buyer. Experience: Minimum of 5 years.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain SFRM through one source from a single manufacturer.

E. SFRM Testing: By a qualified testing and inspecting agency engaged by Contractor or

manufacturer to test for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test
methods.

1. SFRMs are randomly selected for testing from bags bearing the applicable
classification marking of UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
Engineer / authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Testing is performed on specimens of SFRMs that comply with laboratory testing
requirements specified in Part 2 and are otherwise identical to installed fire-resistive
materials, including application of accelerant, sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling,
rolling, and water overspray, if any of these are used in final application.
3. Testing is performed on specimens whose application the independent testing and
inspecting agency witnessed during preparation and conditioning. Include in test
reports a full description of preparation and conditioning of laboratory test specimens.

F. Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to
test for compliance with requirements for specified performance and test methods.

1. Test for bond per ASTM E 736 and requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory"
for coating materials. Provide bond strength indicated in referenced fire-resistance
design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2.
2. Verify that manufacturer, through its own laboratory testing or field experience, has
not found primers or coatings to be incompatible with SFRM.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An accredited, independent agency with the experience and
capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E329; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to
authorities.

H. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the fire-test-response

characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method
indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Engineer /

APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - Page 3 of 13

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

authorities having jurisdiction. Identify bags containing SFRM with appropriate markings
of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire

Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to Engineer / authorities having jurisdiction, for SFRM serving as direct-
applied protection tested per ASTM E 119.
2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.

I. Provide products containing no detectable asbestos as determined according to the method

specified in 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix E, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy."

J. Mockups: Apply mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Extent of Mockups: Approximately 9 sq. m of surface for each product indicated.

K. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements

in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and
procedures related to SFRM including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review products, exposure conditions, design ratings, restrained and unrestrained

conditions, calculations, densities, thicknesses, bond strengths, and other performance
requirements.
2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify sequencing and coordination
requirements.
3. Review weather predictions, ambient conditions, and proposed temporary protections
for SFRM during and after installation.
4. Review surface conditions and preparations.
5. Review field quality-control testing procedures.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to Project site in original, unopened packages with intact and legible
manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, shelf life if
applicable, and fire-resistance ratings applicable to Project.

B. Use materials with limited shelf life within period indicated. Remove from Project site and
discard materials whose shelf life has expired.

C. Store materials inside, under cover, and aboveground; keep dry until ready for use. Remove
from Project site and discard wet or deteriorated materials.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply SFRM when ambient or substrate temperature is

4 deg C or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain temperature
at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product application.

B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of SFRM. Use natural
means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fire-resistive material dries
thoroughly.

APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - Page 4 of 13

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Sequence and coordinate application of SFRM with other related work specified in other
Sections to comply with the following requirements:

1. Provide temporary enclosure as required to confine spraying operations and protect

the environment.
2. Provide temporary enclosures for applications to prevent deterioration of fire-resistive
material due to exposure to weather and to unfavorable ambient conditions for
humidity, temperature, and ventilation.
3. Avoid unnecessary exposure of fire-resistive material to abrasion and other damage
likely to occur during construction operations subsequent to its application.
4. Do not apply fire-resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until concrete
topping, if any, has been completed. For metal roof decks without concrete topping,
do not apply fire-resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until roofing has
been completed; prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of fire-resistive
material.
5. Do not apply fire-resistive material to metal floor deck substrates until concrete
topping has been completed.
6. Do not begin applying fire-resistive material until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves,
and other items penetrating fire protection are in place.
7. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fire-
resistive material until application of fire protection is completed.
8. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fire-resistive material
has been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to defective
applications.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Comply with Division 01 Section "Warranties".

B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Contractor and by Installer, in

which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace SFRMs that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Cracking, flaking, spalling, or eroding in excess of specified requirements;

peeling; or delaminating of SFRM from substrates.
b. Not covered under the warranty are failures due to damage by occupants and
Employer's maintenance personnel, exposure to environmental conditions other
than those investigated and approved during fire-response testing, and other
causes not reasonably foreseeable under conditions of normal use.

2. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special Warranty for Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Corrosion Protection Performance:

Manufacturer's standard form signed by the Contractor and by the Installer, in which
manufacturer agrees to repair or replace steel priming protection coat that fail to provide
corrosion protection to structural steel of 20 years to first maintenance.

APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - Page 5 of 13

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SPRAYED FIRE RESISTIVE SYSTEM

A. Comply with the following:

1. Surface preparation as specified in Division 5, Section “Structural Steel Framing”.

2. Epoxy-zinc-rich primer in number and thickness of coats to satisfy the warranty
period to first maintenance as specified.

a. Corrosion-Protection Prime Coat: Factory-formulated epoxy zinc-rich steel

primer to SSPC-Paint 20 applied at spreading rate recommended by
intumescent paint manufacturer.

1) Primer coat shall comply with ISO 12944 all parts generally and ISO
12944-5 specifically for Corrosivity Category C3, High Durability.
2) Primer shall be warranted by manufacturer as providing corrosion
protection to first maintenance of not less than 20 years.
3) Primer's bond strength complies with requirements specified in UL's
"Fire Resistance Directory" for coating materials based on a series of
bond tests per ASTM E 736.
4) Primer is identical to those used in assemblies tested for fire-test-
response characteristics of SFRM per ASTM E 119 by UL or another
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Engineer / authorities having
jurisdiction.
5) Volume Solids: Not less than 70% ± 3, with high zinc content in the dry
film.
6) Shall be applicable in not less than of the specified minimum thickness
of 80 microns.

a) Corrosion protection primer shall be applied in the factory.

b) Application: Airless Spray.

3. Adhesive for bonding fire-resistive material certified as compatible with the applied
primer.
4. SFRM in thickness required to obtain the indicated fire resistance rating for each
structural steel section based on the ratio Hp/A of the section and the loading tables
(coating thickness tables) certified by the third party testing agency which accredited
the fire rating of the SFRM product.
5. Two sealer coats where the SFRM is used within a ceiling air plenum.
6. Two acrylic coats where the SFRM is used within a ceiling maintenance plenum or
where shown on Drawings or directed by Engineer.

a. Color: As selected by Engineer.

B. Features:

1. Cementitious, durable, remains in place during construction and beyond.

2. Film build-on all surfaces including columns, beams and decks.
3. Applicator friendly, high film build, no alum required for increased coverage and
easy clean-up.
4. Asbestos-free, complies with EPA and OSHA regulations.
5. Mineral-wool free, no airborne fibers.
6. Alum and chloride free, no special priming required.

APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - Page 6 of 13

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

7. Styrene free, no toxic decomposition gasses.

8. Multiple UL designs, provides for design flexibility with over 40 UL designs.
9. Quality Manufactured, under strict quality standards.
10. UL inspection service, consistent quality in every bag.
11. Ready to use, no site additives required.

2.2 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS (SFRM)

A. Available Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturer that may

be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Concealed Cementitious SFRM:

a. Carboline Co., Fireproofing Products Div.

b. GCP Applied Technologies Inc. (formerly Grace Construction Products).
c. Isolatek International Corp.

B. Material Composition: Manufacturer's standard product, as follows:

1. Factory-mixed, dry formulation of gypsum or portland cement binders, additives, and

lightweight mineral or synthetic aggregates mixed with water at Project site to form a
slurry or mortar for conveyance and application.

C. Low Density Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated, or higher
values required to attain designated fire-resistance ratings, measured per standard test
methods referenced with each property as follows:

1. Use for a building height up to 22.8 m above the lowest level of fire department
vehicle access as per IBC requirements.
2. Dry Density: 240 kg/cu. m for average and individual densities, or greater if required
to attain fire-resistance ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical
Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method."
3. Thickness: As required for fire-resistance design indicated, measured according to
requirements of fire-resistance design or ASTM E605, whichever is thicker, but not
less than 0.375 inch (9 mm).
4. Bond Strength: 16 kPa minimum per ASTM E 736 based on laboratory testing of 19-
mm minimum thickness of SFRM.
5. Compressive Strength: 65 kPa minimum per ASTM E 761. Minimum thickness of
SFRM tested shall be 19 mm and minimum dry density shall be as specified but not
less than 240 kg/cu. m.
6. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937.
7. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 759.
8. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per
ASTM E 760.
9. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.000 g/sq. m in 24 hours per ASTM E 859.
For laboratory tests, minimum thickness of SFRM is 19 mm, maximum dry density is
240 kg/cu. m, test specimens are not prepurged by mechanically induced air
velocities, and tests are terminated after 24 hours.
10. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the following surface-
burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by
UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Engineer / authorities
having jurisdiction:

a. Flame-Spread Index: 10 or less.

APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - Page 7 of 13

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

b. Smoke-Developed Index: 0.

11. Fungal Resistance: No observed growth on specimens per ASTM G 21.

D. Medium Density Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated, or

higher values required to attain designated fire-resistance ratings, measured per standard test
methods referenced with each property as follows:

1. Use for a building height above 22.8 m as per IBC requirements.

2. Dry Density: 350 kg/cu. m for average and individual densities, or greater if required
to attain fire-resistance ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical
Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method."
3. Thickness: As required for fire-resistance design indicated, measured according to
requirements of fire-resistance design or ASTM E605, whichever is thicker, but not
less than 0.375 inch (9 mm).
4. Bond Strength: 90 kPa minimum per ASTM E 736 based on laboratory testing.
5. Compressive Strength: 650 kPa minimum per ASTM E 761.
6. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937.
7. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 759.
8. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per
ASTM E 760.
9. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.000 g/sq. m in 24 hours per ASTM E 859.
For laboratory tests, minimum thickness of SFRM is 19 mm, test specimens are not
prepurged by mechanically induced air velocities, and tests are terminated after 24
hours.
10. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the following surface-
burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by
UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Engineer / authorities
having jurisdiction:

a. Flame-Spread Index: 10 or less.

b. Smoke-Developed Index: 0.

11. Fungal Resistance: No observed growth on specimens per ASTM G 21.

E. High Density Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated, or higher
values required to attain designated fire-resistance ratings, measured per standard test
methods referenced with each property as follows:

1. Use for smooth finished SFRM.

2. Dry Density: 640 kg/cu. m for average and individual densities, or greater if required
to attain fire-resistance ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical
Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method."
3. Thickness: As required for fire-resistance design indicated, measured according to
requirements of fire-resistance design or ASTM E605, whichever is thicker, but not
less than 0.375 inch (9 mm).
4. Bond Strength: 700-kPa minimum per ASTM E 736 based on laboratory testing.
5. Compressive Strength: 3500 kPa minimum per ASTM E 761.
6. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937.
7. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 759.
8. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per
ASTM E 760.
9. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.000 g/sq. m in 24 hours per ASTM E 859.
For laboratory tests, minimum thickness of SFRM is 19 mm, test specimens are not

APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - Page 8 of 13

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

prepurged by mechanically induced air velocities, and tests are terminated after 24
hours.
10. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the following surface-
burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by
UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Engineer / authorities
having jurisdiction:

a. Flame-Spread Index: 10 or less.

b. Smoke-Developed Index: 0.

11. Fungal Resistance: No observed growth on specimens per ASTM G 21.

2.3 AUXILIARY FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary fire-resistive materials that are compatible with SFRM and
substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
Engineer / authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated.

B. Structural steel, whether interior or exterior shall receive an anti-corrosive primer coating, as
per structural steel specifications prior to the application of spray applied fireproofing. The
application of the anti-corrosive primer to protect the underlying structural steel shall be as
per the recommendations in the UL Fire Resistance Directory and may require the use of
bonding agents or mechanical attachment on beams, columns, tube and pipe steel to
maintain the fire-resistive rating. Obtain the certification of the coating supplier that the
primer is fully compatible with portland cement based fireproofing. An on-site mock-up and
bond test shall be performed on all unknown or untested coatings prior to application of
fireproofing to determine compatibility.

1. Primers based on chlorinated rubber, bitumen or solvent born thermoplastics should

not be used because of their softening in case of fire.

C. Adhesive for Bonding Fire-Resistive Material: Product approved by manufacturer of

SFRM.

D. Metal Lath: Expanded metal lath fabricated from material of weight, configuration, and
finish required to comply with fire-resistance designs indicated and fire-resistive material
manufacturer's written recommendations. Include clips, lathing accessories, corner beads,
and other anchorage devices required to attach lath to substrates and to receive SFRM.

E. Reinforcing Fabric: Glass- or carbon-fiber fabric of type, weight, and form required to
comply with fire-resistance designs indicated; approved and provided by manufacturer of
SFRM.

F. Reinforcing Mesh: Metallic mesh reinforcement of type, weight, and form required to
comply with fire-resistance designs indicated; approved and provided by manufacturer of
intumescent mastic coating fire-resistive material. Include pins and attachment.

G. Sealer for Sprayed-Fiber Fire-Resistive Material: Transparent-drying, water-dispersible,

tinted protective coating recommended in writing by manufacturer of sprayed-fiber fire-
resistive material.

H. Topcoat: Type recommended in writing by manufacturer of each SFRM for application over
concealed SFRM.

APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - Page 9 of 13

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

I. Cement-Based Topcoat: Factory-mixed, cementitious hardcoat formulation recommended in

writing by manufacturer of SFRM for trowel or spray application over concealed SFRM.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of work. A substrate
is in satisfactory condition if it complies with the following:

1. Substrates comply with requirements in the Section where the substrate and related
materials and construction are specified.
2. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale,
loose scale, incompatible primers, incompatible paints, incompatible encapsulants, or
other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fire-resistive materials with
substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure.
3. Objects penetrating fire-resistive material, including clips, hangers, support sleeves,
and similar items, are securely attached to substrates.
4. Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended
construction that will interfere with applying fire-resistive material.

B. Verify that concrete work on steel deck has been completed.

C. Verify that roof construction, installation of roof-top HVAC equipment, and other related
work are completed.

D. Conduct tests according to fire-resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations to

verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fire-resistive materials
during application.

B. Cleaning: Before applying coatings or other surface treatments, clean substrates of

substances that could impair bond of the fire-resistive material.

1. Schedule cleaning and painting application so dust and other contaminants will not
fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
2. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written
instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified:

a. Prior to applying primer the steel surfaces shall be blast cleaned to SA 2½ (ISO
8501-1).

C. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer unless compatible

shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive SFRM.

APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - Page 10 of 13

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with fire-resistive material manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials,
application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and spray on fire-
resistive material, as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to
achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

B. Apply SFRM that is identical to products tested as specified in Part 1 "Quality Assurance"
Article and substantiated by test reports, with respect to rate of application, accelerator use,
sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, water overspray, or other materials and procedures
affecting test results.

C. Install metal lath and reinforcing fabric, as required, to comply with fire-resistance ratings
and fire-resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of
exposure and intended use. Securely attach lath and fabric to substrate in position required
for support and reinforcement of fire-resistive material. Use anchorage devices of type
recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer. Attach accessories where indicated or
required for secure attachment of lath and fabric to substrate.

D. Coat substrates with bonding adhesive before applying fire-resistive material where required
to achieve fire-resistance rating or as recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer for
material and application indicated.

E. Extend fire-resistive material in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be
protected. Unless otherwise recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer, install body
of fire-resistive covering in a single course.

F. Spray apply fire-resistive materials to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying
operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement
method recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer.

G. For applications over encapsulant materials, including lockdown (post-removal)

encapsulants, apply SFRM that differs in color from that of encapsulant over which it is
applied.

H. Where sealers are used, apply products that are tinted to differentiate them from SFRM over
which they are applied.

3.4 APPLICATION, CONCEALED SFRM

A. Apply concealed SFRM in thicknesses and densities not less than those required to achieve
fire-resistance ratings designated for each condition, but apply in greater thicknesses and
densities if specified in Part 2.

B. Cure concealed SFRM according to product manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.5 APPLICATION, EXPOSED SFRM

A. Apply exposed SFRM in thicknesses and densities not less than those required to achieve
fire-resistance ratings designated for each condition, but apply in greater thicknesses and
densities if indicated.

APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - Page 11 of 13

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

B. Provide a uniform finish complying with description indicated for each type of material and
matching Engineer's sample or, if none, finish approved for field-erected mockup.

C. Apply exposed cementitious SFRM to produce the following finish:

1. Smooth, troweled finish with surface markings eliminated and edges squared.

D. Cure exposed SFRM according to product manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special
inspection and prepare reports:

1. SFRM.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and
prepare test reports.

1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether
tested work complies with or deviates from requirements.

C. Tests and Inspections: Testing and inspecting of completed applications of SFRM shall take
place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using methods as follows. Do not proceed
with application of SFRM for the next area until test results for previously completed
applications of SFRM show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or
exceed values indicated and required for approved fire-resistance design.

1. Thickness for Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: For each 93-sq. m area, or partial
area, on each floor, from the average of 4 measurements from a 0.093-sq. m sample
area, with sample width of not less than 152 mm per ASTM E 605.
2. Thickness for Structural Frame Members: From a sample of 25 percent of structural
members per floor, taking 9 measurements at a single cross section for structural
frame beams or girders, 7 measurements of a single cross section for joists and
trusses, and 12 measurements of a single cross section for columns per ASTM E 605.
3. Density for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Frame Members: At frequency and
from sample size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and
structural framing member, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A,
Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method."
4. Bond Strength for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Framing Members: For each
929 sq. m area, or partial area, on each floor, cohesion and adhesion from one sample
of size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and structural
framing member, per ASTM E 736.

a. Field test SFRM that is applied to flanges of wide-flange, structural-steel

members on surfaces matching those that will exist for remainder of steel
receiving fire-resistive material.
b. If surfaces of structural steel receiving SFRM are primed or otherwise painted
for coating materials, perform series of bond tests specified in UL's "Fire
Resistance Directory." Provide bond strength indicated in referenced UL fire-
resistance criteria.

APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - Page 12 of 13

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

5. If testing finds applications of SFRM are not in compliance with requirements, testing
and inspecting agency will perform additional random testing to determine extent of
noncompliance.

D. Remove and replace applications of SFRM that do not pass tests and inspections for
cohesion and adhesion, for density, or for both and retest as specified above.

E. Apply additional SFRM, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results indicate
that thickness does not comply with specified requirements, and retest as specified above.

3.7 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIR

A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of

Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean
exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.

B. Protect SFRM, according to advice of product manufacturer and Installer, from damage
resulting from construction operations or other causes so fire protection will be without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

C. Coordinate application of SFRM with other construction to minimize need to cut or remove
fire protection. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect SFRM and patch any
damaged or removed areas.

D. Repair or replace work that has not successfully protected steel.

END OF SECTION 078100

APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - Page 13 of 13

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

SECTION 078123 - INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes intumescent fire-resistive coatings suitable for interior and exterior
applications.

1. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, applications of fireproof intumescent paint

includes, but shall not be limited to, any structural steel surface indicated to be fire
resistant rated and is exposed to view and not concealed beyond any other work item
similar to cladding, suspended ceiling or lining.
2. Corrosion protection priming coat is to be provided as a coating layer of the
intumescent paint system.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 05 Section ˝Structural Steel Framing˝ for coordinating surface preparation

requirements.
2. Division 07 Section "Applied Fireproofing" for sprayed fire-resistive materials
(SFRM).

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-resistive requirements for building systems and components shall be as shown in Fire
Zoning Drawings and Fire Report.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review products, design ratings, restrained and unrestrained conditions, thicknesses,

and other performance requirements.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit in compliance with Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures.”

B. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Comply with Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING 078123 - Page 1 of 11

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including,

but not limited to, the following:

a. For each indicated fire protection period; valid third-party certified loading
tables that indicate different thickness of the intumescent coating for each steel
section or profile (I-beam, angles, channels, plates and hollow sections) in
different applications (beam; column and bracing) for the loaded case. Indicate
also the maximum temperature that can be withstood by the coating during the
fire resistance period.
b. Third party test reports to indicate compliance of submitted materials with
requirements specified for flame spread and smoke developed indices in this
Section.
c. Third party test reports to indicate the properties of submitted materials as
specified.
d. Evaluation of the expected lift time for the fire proofing performance of the
submitted coating.
e. Instructions for handling, storing, and applying intumescent paint materials.

C. Shop Drawings: Structural framing plans indicating the following:

1. Extent of fireproofing for each construction and fire-resistance rating.

2. Applicable fire-resistance design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Minimum fireproofing thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-resistance rating of
each structural component and assembly.
4. Treatment of fireproofing after application.

D. Detailed tables prepared based on the approved shop drawings of structural steel works that
indicate type, application, properties, Hp/A ratio of each structural steel section, case of fire
exposure and thickness of intumescent coating that will be applied to the steel sections. Tables
shall be signed by the representative of the Intumescent coating Subcontractor and sealed by
said Subcontractor and Contractor.

E. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, in manufacturer's
standard dimensions to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of actual
substrate.

1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including primer, intumescent
paint and finish coat. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review.
Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture of finish coat are achieved.

F. Material test reports from a qualified accredited independent testing agency, approved by
Engineer, indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated.
Test report shall include manufacturer name and contacts in addition to tested product name
and detailed description.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data:

1. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with
project name, addresses, names of Engineer and Employers, and other information
specified.

INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING 078123 - Page 2 of 11

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2. For Testing Agency Qualifications include proof of qualifications in the form of a

recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of fireproofing.

C. Field quality-control reports.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Cleaning and maintenance instructions for inclusion in project`s operation and maintenance
manual.

1.8 LOCAL REGULATIONS AND CODES

A. Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, and regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.

1. Obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Comply with Egyptian Codes and Standards requirements and latest circulars.

1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Comply with Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements.”

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems

similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As
applicable, procure products from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements,
warranty requirements, and technical or factory-authorized service representative
requirements. Experience: Minimum of 10 years.

C. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by

fireproofing manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install
manufacturer's products according to specified requirements. Experience: Minimum of 5
years.

D. Field Quality Control Testing Agency Pre-qualifications: The following pre-qualifications

documents are still need to be included in the submittal for qualifying testing agency:

1. Legal constitution of the company and names of owners.

2. Approvals, licenses, accreditations by authorities in Egypt.
3. Qualifications of company according to ASTM E 699 “Standard Practice for
Evaluation of Agencies Involved in Testing, Quality Assurance, and Evaluating of
Building Components”.
4. Copy of the valid ISO certification.
5. Copy of company manual and procedures.
6. List of equipment that will be employed in the project and their catalogues.
7. Detailed list of activities and tests that will be conducted by the submitted testing third-
party testing agency including the samples of test reports that will be produced in the
project.

INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING 078123 - Page 3 of 11

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

E. Testing Agency Qualifications: An accredited, independent agency with the experience and
capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where
required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

F. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup of each type of fireproofing and different substrate and each required
finish as shown on Drawings.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Engineer specifically approves such
deviations in writing.
3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Comply with Division 01 Section "Warranties".

B. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Employer of other rights the Employer may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the
Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

C. Special Warranty for paint finishes: Provide complete system warranty in which
Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are jointly and responsible and shall agree to repair or
replace paint coatings that fail within the specified warranty period. Contractor and
Manufacturer shall reimburse the Employer for the cost of material and labor. Failures
include, but are not limited to:

1. Peeling or blistering of paint film.

2. Failure to protect against corrosion.
2. Failure to protect against fire for the specified time
3. Cracking of paint film.
4. Crazing of paint film
5. Efflorescence.
6. Change in color.
7. Staining.
8. Patchiness of sheen or colour.

D. Warranty Period for Paint Coatings:

1. Warranty for the life of the first maintenance of the paint system to satisfy the life to
first maintenance of 20 years against corrosion.
2. Warranty for the life of the first maintenance for the intumescent layer itself to first
maintenance of 10 years against fire.

1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 7 deg C.

INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING 078123 - Page 4 of 11

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.

1.12 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply fireproofing when ambient or substrate temperature

is 10 deg C or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain
temperature at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product
application.

B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of fireproofing, providing
complete air exchanges according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use natural means
or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fireproofing dries thoroughly.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Assemblies: Provide fireproofing, including auxiliary materials, according to requirements

of each fire-resistance design and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain fireproofing for each fire-resistance design from single source.

1. Provide Proprietary intumescent paint system including all system coats.

C. Fire-Resistance Design: Indicated on Drawings, tested according to ASTM E 119 or UL 263

by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable
testing agency.

1. Steel members are to be considered unrestrained unless specifically noted otherwise.

2. Fire Resistance Rating: Fire-resistive requirements for building systems and
components shall be as shown in Fire Zoning Drawings and Fire Report.

D. Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos.

2.2 MASTIC AND INTUMESCENT FIRE-RESISTIVE COATINGS

A. Structural Steel: Provide the following intumescent paint system over new load-bearing
structural construction. Intumescent paint system shall consist of the following coats:

1. Corrosion protection primer compatible with intumescent paint and approved by

fireproofing manufacturer and complying with required fire-resistance design by UL
or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Intumescent coating in multiple-coat application according to required thickness.
3. Finish topcoat with high performance approved paint suitable for application over
applied fireproofing; of type recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer for
each fire-resistance design in the indicated or selected color.

INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING 078123 - Page 5 of 11

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

B. Corrosion-Protection Prime Coat: Factory-formulated epoxy zinc-rich steel primer to SSPC-

Paint 20 applied at spreading rate recommended by intumescent paint manufacturer.

1. Primer coat shall comply with ISO 12944 all parts generally and ISO 12944-5
specifically for Corrosivity Category C3, High Durability.
2. Primer shall be warranted by manufacturer as providing corrosion protection to first
maintenance of not less than 20 years.
3. Primer is certified by manufacturer as compatible with intumescent coat material.
4. Primer's bond strength complies with requirements specified in UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory" for coating materials.
5. Primer is identical to those used in assemblies tested for fire-test-response
characteristics of intumescent coating per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to Engineer / authorities having jurisdiction.
6. Volume Solids: Not less than 70% ± 3, with high zinc content in the dry film.
7. Shall be applicable in not less than of the specified minimum thickness of 80 microns.

a. Corrosion protection primer shall be applied in the factory.

b. Application: Airless Spray.

C. Intumescent Paint Layer: Manufacturer's standard, factory-mixed formulation, and complying

with indicated fire-resistance design, intumescent fire resistive coating for load-bearing
structural steel that is compatible with primer specified and accept wide range of decorative
finish coatings and comply with following:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Carboline Company, subsidiary of RPM International, Fireproofing Products

Div.
b. International Paint Limited, subsidiary of Akzo Nobel N. V.
c. Isolatek International.
d. Contego International,
e. Jotun.

2. Application: Designated for "exterior", "interior general purpose" and "conditioned

interior space purpose" as per the location of steel structure, use by a qualified testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Thickness: As required for fire-resistance rating indicated for each application area
based on the ratio Hp/A for each structural steel section to be protected.

a. Hp: The perimeter of the steel section.

b. A: The cross section area of the steel section.

4. Number of coats: One or more coat based on required thickness and manufacturer’s
recommended maximum thickness per coat.
5. Physical Properties:

a. Bond Strength: 2.20 MPa as per ASTM D 4541.

b. Abrasion Resistance: 0.23 g/1000 cycles as per ASTM D 4060.
c. Impact Resistant: 44 in-lbs as per ASTM D 2794.
d. Hardness: Not less than 65, Type D durometer, according to ASTM D 2240.
e. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a
qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.

INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING 078123 - Page 6 of 11

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

1) Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

2) Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

D. Topcoat: Acrylic/Aliphatic polyurethane finish coating recommended by intumescent paint

manufacturer. Paint film shall exhibit excellent gloss and color retention, durability, scratch
and abrasion resistance and chemical resistance. Comply with the following:

1. Paint is identical to those used in assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics

of intumescent coating per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to Engineer / authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Binder: Acrylic polyurethane.
3. Pigments: Rutile titanium dioxide and/or color pigments and functional extenders.
4. Appearance: Satin or Semi-Gloss as indicated or directed by Engineer.
5. % Solids, by Volume: 70%± 2%, minimum.
6. Dry Film Thickness: Apply one coat at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer
to achieve a dry film thickness of 90 microns.
7. Color: As indicated on Drawings or selected by Engineer from manufacturer’s full
range of colors.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with fireproofing and substrates and
are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated.

B. Reinforcing Fabric: Glass- or carbon-fiber fabric of type, weight, and form required to
comply with fire-resistance designs indicated; approved and provided by fireproofing
manufacturer.

C. Reinforcing Mesh: Metallic mesh reinforcement of type, weight, and form required to comply
with fire-resistance design indicated; approved and provided by fireproofing manufacturer.
Include pins and attachment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the Work and
according to each fire-resistance design. Verify compliance with the following:

1. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale,
loose scale, incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, or other foreign substances
capable of impairing bond of fireproofing with substrates under conditions of normal
use or fire exposure.
2. Objects penetrating fireproofing, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar
items, are securely attached to substrates.
3. Substrates receiving fireproofing are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, or
other suspended construction that will interfere with fireproofing application.

B. Conduct tests according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations to verify that

substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond.

INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING 078123 - Page 7 of 11

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of

the Work.

D. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total intumescent paint system for various substrates. On Engineer's
request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible
primers.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fireproofing materials during
application.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fireproofing.

C. Cleaning: Before applying coatings or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances
that could impair bond of intumescent paint systems.

1. Schedule cleaning and painting application so dust and other contaminants will not fall
on wet, newly painted surfaces.
2. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written
instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified:

a. Prior to applying primer the steel surfaces shall be blast cleaned to SA 2½ (ISO
8501-1).

D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written
instructions.

1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and as
required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove
surface film and strain material before using.

E. Prime substrates where included in fire-resistance design and where recommended in writing
by fireproofing manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in
satisfactory condition to receive fireproofing.

F. For applications visible on completion of Project, repair substrates to remove surface

imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of
fireproofing. Remove minor projections and fill voids that would telegraph through fire-
resistive products after application.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Construct fireproofing assemblies that are identical to fire-resistance design indicated and
products as specified, tested, and substantiated by test reports; for thickness, primers, topcoats,
finishing, and other materials and procedures affecting fireproofing work.

INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING 078123 - Page 8 of 11

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

B. Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials,

application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and apply fireproofing;
as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance
ratings indicated.

C. Coordinate application of fireproofing with other construction to minimize need to cut or

remove fireproofing.

1. Do not begin applying fireproofing until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other
items penetrating fireproofing are in place.
2. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying
fireproofing until application of fireproofing is completed.

D. Install auxiliary materials as required, as detailed, and according to fire-resistance design and
fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of exposure and intended
use. For auxiliary materials, use attachment and anchorage devices of type recommended in
writing by fireproofing manufacturer.

E. Spray apply fireproofing to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in
each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method
recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.

F. Extend fireproofing in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected.

G. Install body of fireproofing in a single course unless otherwise recommended in writing by

fireproofing manufacturer.

H. Provide a uniform finish complying with description indicated for each type of fireproofing
material and matching finish approved for required mockups.

I. Cure fireproofing according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations.

J. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fireproofing has been applied,
inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to deficient applications.

K. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or
otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent
surface deterioration.

1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of the
application method.
2. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by
the manufacturer.
3. If intumescent coat show through the finish topcoat, apply additional coats until paint
film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance.
4. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed
fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
5. Any damage to the factory-applied priming coat shall be repaired and touched-up in
compliance with recommendations of priming coat manufacturer application of
intumescent paint shall not commence without written approval of prime coat by the
Engineer.
6. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat
surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under
moderate thumb pressure, and where applying another coat of paint does not cause the
undercoat to lose adhesion.

INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING 078123 - Page 9 of 11

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

7. Produce a smooth surface film using multiple coats. Provide a finish free of laps, runs,
color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
8. Completed Work: Match approved samples for texture and coverage. Remove, refinish,
or repaint work not complying with specified requirements.

L. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less and not more than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate for the surface to be coated. Provide the total dry film thickness
of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer to provide surface-burning
characteristics and fire resistance rating specified.

M. Apply nonintumescent topcoats using materials and application methods according to

manufacturer's written instructions.

N. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Removed,
refinish, or repaint work not complying with specified requirements.

O. Finishes: Where indicated, apply fireproofing to produce the following finishes:

1. Manufacturer's Standard Finishes: Finish according to manufacturer's written

instructions for each finish selected.
2. Spray-Textured Finish: Finish left as spray applied with no further treatment.
3. Rolled, Spray-Textured Finish: Even finish produced by rolling spray-applied finish
with a damp paint roller to remove drippings and excessive roughness.
4. Skip-Troweled Finish: Even leveled surface produced by troweling spray-applied
finish to smooth out the texture and neaten edges.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special
inspections:

1. Test and inspect as required by the IBC, 1705.15, and AWCI Technical Manual 12-B,
Third Edition; Standard Practice for the Testing and Inspection of Field Applied Thin
Film Intumescent Fire-Resistive Materials.

B. Perform the tests and inspections of completed Work in successive stages. Do not proceed
with application of fireproofing for the next area until test results for previously completed
applications of fireproofing show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal
or exceed values as specified and as indicated and required for approved fire-resistance
design.

C. Fireproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

1. Remove and replace fireproofing that does not pass tests and inspections, and retest.
2. Apply additional fireproofing, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test
results indicate insufficient thickness, and retest.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING 078123 - Page 10 of 11

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

3.5 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIRING

A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of

Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean
exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.

B. Protect fireproofing, according to advice of manufacturer and Installer, from damage resulting
from construction operations or other causes, so fireproofing will be without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

C. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect fireproofing and repair damaged areas
and fireproofing removed due to work of other trades.

D. Repair fireproofing damaged by other work before concealing it with other construction.

E. Repair fireproofing by reapplying it using same method as original installation or using

manufacturer's recommended trowel-applied product.

END OF SECTION 078123

INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING 078123 - Page 11 of 11

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.

2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.
3. Penetrations in smoke barriers.

B. Related Sections: For guidance, related requirements may be specified in other Sections
such as, but not necessarily limited to:

1. Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."

2. Division 21 Sections specifying fire-suppression piping penetrations.
3. Division 22 and 23 Sections specifying duct and piping penetrations.
4. Division 26, 27, and 28 Sections specifying cable and conduit penetrations.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit in compliance with Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures.”

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1. Comply with Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

C. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each type of
construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and type of
penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting
agency that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated.

1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting

agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop system configuration
for construction and penetrating items.
2. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting
agency's illustration for a particular through-penetration firestop condition, submit
illustration, with modifications marked, approved by through-penetration firestop
system manufacturer's fire-protection qualified engineer as an engineering judgment
or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.

D. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design
designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - Page 1 of 11

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting

agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit
illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping
manufacturer's fire-protection qualified engineer as an engineering judgment or
equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data:

1. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with
project name, addresses, names of Engineer and Employers, and other information
specified.
2. For Testing Agency Qualifications include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

B. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in
compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.

C. Installer Experience: Installer must provide documentation that he/she has been licensed
and/or certified for the installation of firestopping products and materials by the specific
manufacturer which he/she intends to use for this project. Licensing and Certifications are
valid for a period of time not to exceed two years. If certification occurred more than two
years prior to the commencement of said project, installer status will be suspended until
recertification can occur. Installer must furnish a list of five (minimum) projects of a similar
nature which have been successfully carried out by said installer. This list shall also contain
the following:

1. Project names and addresses.

2. Engineer name and addresses.
3. Employers name and address.
4. Any other information specified.

D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for penetration firestopping. Test report shall include manufacturer name
and contacts in addition to tested product name and detailed description.

E. Product Certificates: For through-penetration firestop system products, signed by product

manufacturer.

F. Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through-

penetration firestop system, along with the following information:

1. Types of penetrating items.

2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where
applicable, thicknesses of construction penetrated.
3. Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop design
designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - Page 2 of 11

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

1.5 LOCAL REGULATIONS AND CODES

A. Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, and regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.

1. Obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Comply with Egyptian Codes and Standards requirements and latest circulars.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Comply with Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements.”

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems

similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As
applicable, procure products from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements,
warranty requirements, and technical or factory-authorized service representative
requirements. Experience: Minimum of 10 years.

C. Engage an experienced Installer with minimum five years documented experience who is
certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the firestopping manufacturer as having the
necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified
requirements and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty. Include project names
and addresses, names and addresses of architects/ engineers and owners, and other
information specified or required by Engineer. All workers shall be certified by firestopping
manufacturer. Contractor shall provide documentation of employee’s qualifications prior to
starting work

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An accredited, independent agency with the experience and
capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where
required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

E. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems and

fire-resistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer.

F. Source Limitations: Obtain all system components and accessories from single source from
single manufacturer. If some components are not produced by system manufacture,
obtaining these components from other sources may be approved subject to
recommendation in writing by system manufacturer provided it does not negate the
warranty. Submit for Engineer’s approval

G. Undivided Responsibility: All products in this section and Division7, Section “Fire-
Resistive Joint Systems” shall be the products of one single Manufacturer, and executed by
the same approved authorized Installer.

H. Mock-Ups:

1. Install mock-ups for each firestopping system, including typical penetrations,

construction joints, and perimeter firestop systems, as required to maintain each fire-
resistive rated assembly.

a. System Components: Include as necessary to illustrate compete system for

each hourly rating.

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - Page 3 of 11

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

b. UL Classified System: Attach drawing and instructions required for installation

adjacent to each mock-up. Do not remove prior to acceptance of mock-up.
c. Testing and Verification: Determine depth and configuration of each field-
installed firestopping system. Destructive testing is not required for factory-
metered systems.

2. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before start of Work.

3. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed Work.

a. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial

Completion may become part of the completed Work.

I. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the

following requirements:

1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable

to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in
"Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the
following requirements:

a. Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified

testing and inspecting agency.
b. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to designations
listed by the following:

1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."

2) Intertek ETL SEMKO in its "Directory of Listed Building Products."
3) FM Global in its "Building Materials Approval Guide."

J. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements

in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver penetration firestopping system products to Project site in original, unopened

containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and
manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life if applicable, qualified testing and
inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project, curing time, and mixing
instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their
deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other
causes.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when

ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration
firestop system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or
other causes.

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - Page 4 of 11

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

B. Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by

natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Comply with Division 01 Section "Warranties".

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer,

Contractor and Installer are jointly and severally liable and agree to repair or replace
component of firestopping in case of failure in materials or workmanship to meet the
specifications within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration

firestopping systems are installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate

penetration firestopping systems.

C. Notify Employer's inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of through-penetration

firestop system installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of
installations.

D. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become

concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined
by Employer's inspecting agency and building inspector, if required by authorities having
jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:

1. Specified Technologies Inc.

2. 3M Fire Protection Products.
3. Hilti, Inc.
4. Passive Fire Protection Partners.
5. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group.

2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire
according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain
original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - Page 5 of 11

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with
penetrating items if any.

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings

determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential
of 2.49 Pa.

1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings

determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential
of 2.49 Pa.

1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

2. T-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined

per UL 1479.

1. L-Rating: Not exceeding total cumulative leakage of 0.025 cu. m/s per sq. m of
penetration opening at 74.7 Pa at both ambient and elevated temperatures.

E. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping complying with Class 1 W Ratings when tested
according to UL 1479.

F. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-

developed indexes of less than 25 and 50, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84 or
UL 723.

G. Performance Requirements:

1. Provide products that upon curing do not re-emulsify, dissolve, leach, breakdown or
otherwise deteriorate over time from exposure to atmospheric moisture, sweating
pipes, ponding water or other forms of moisture characteristic during and after
construction.
2. Provide firestop sealants sufficiently flexible to accommodate motion such as pipe
vibration, water hammer, thermal expansion and other normal building movement
without damage to the seal.
3. Pipe insulation shall not be removed, cut away or otherwise interrupted through wall
or floor openings. Provide products appropriately tested for the thickness and type of
insulation utilized.
4. Fire rated pathway devices shall be the preferred product and shall be installed in all
locations where frequent cable moves, add-ons and changes will occur.
5. When mechanical cable pathways are not practical, openings within walls and floors
designed to accommodate voice, data and video cabling shall be provided with re-
enterable products specifically designed for retrofit.
6. Penetrants passing through fire-resistance rated floor-ceiling assemblies contained
within chase wall assemblies shall be protected with products tested by being fully
exposed to the fire outside of the chase wall. Systems within the UL Fire Resistance
Directory that meet this criterion are identified with the words “Chase Wall
Optional”.
7. Provide fire-resistive joint sealants sufficiently flexible to accommodate movement
such as thermal expansion and other normal building movement without damage to
the seal.

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - Page 6 of 11

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

8. Provide fire-resistive joint sealants designed to accommodate a specific range of

movement and tested for this purpose in accordance with a cyclic movement test
criteria as outlined in Standards, ASTM E-1399, ASTM E-1966 or ANSI/ UL 2079.
9. Provide penetration firestop systems, fire-resistive joint systems, or perimeter fire
barrier systems subjected to an air leakage test conducted in accordance with
Standard, ANSI/ UL1479 for penetrations and ANSI/UL2079 for joint systems with
published L-Ratings for ambient and elevated temperatures as evidence of the ability
of firestop system to restrict the movement of smoke.
10. Provide T-Rating Collar Devices tested in accordance with ASTM E-814 or
ANSI/UL1479 for metallic pipe penetrations requiring T-Ratings per the applicable
building code.

H. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed
to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components
specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and
inspecting agency for firestopping indicated.

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:

a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation.

b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials
to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.
c. Fire-rated form board.
d. Fillers for sealants.

2. Temporary forming materials.

3. Substrate primers.
4. Collars.
5. Steel sleeves.

2.3 FILL MATERIALS

A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete

floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial
extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a
neoprene gasket.

B. Intumescent Sealants: Single-component intumescent sealants containing water resistant

intumescent ingredients that expand a minimum of 8 times when heated.

C. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure
during exposure to moisture.

D. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with
intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

E. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric

sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.

F. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant 100% solids, intumescent

putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.

G. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets faced on both

sides with polyethylene film.

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - Page 7 of 11

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

H. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic

cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to
form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.

1. Thickness: 114 mm minimum but not less than that to achieve the 2 hrs. fire rating.
2. Installation: As per manufacturers written instructions.

I. Pillows/Bags: Reusable intumescent pillow heat sealed in a fire-retardant poly bag with a
noncombustible, monolithic core encapsulated on all sides with intumescent coating.
Pillows shall not contain any loose fill. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-
reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed.

J. Coated Batts: A lightweight fire barrier comprising of a mineral fiber board coated with an
elastomeric, ablative water based sealant. The assembly to be tested for the indicated fire
ratings in accordance with Performance Requirements specified in this Section.

1. Thickness: Not less than that required to achieve the performance criteria fire rating
duration.

K. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed,

expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

L. Fire-Rated HVAC Retaining Angles: Steel angle system with integral intumescent firestop
gasket for use on steel HVAC ducts.

M. Firestop Plugs: Re-enterable, foam rubber plug impregnated with intumescent material for
use in blank openings and cable sleeves.

N. Fire-Rated T Rating Collar Device: Louvered steel collar system with synthetic aluminized
polymer coolant wrap installed on metallic pipes where T Ratings are required by applicable
building code requirements.

O. Fire-Rated Cable Grommet: Molded two-piece grommet made from plenum grade polymer
with a foam inner core for sealing individual cable penetrations up to 0.27 in. (7 mm)
diameter.

P. Fire Rated Cable Pathways: Re-enterable device modules comprised of steel raceway with
intumescent foam pads allowing 0 to 100 percent cable fill. These device modules shall be
engineered such that two or more devices may be ganged together for greater capacity.

Q. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of

grade indicated below:

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other

horizontal surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped
surfaces, unless indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both opening
conditions.

R. Fire Retardant Spray: FM approved and UL certified, single component fire protective cable
coating, water-based ablative elastomer that will intumesce to protect single or grouped
electrical cables against flame propagation. The coating shall dry to form a flexible, water
and weather-resistant film and shall not contain solvents, asbestos, or inorganic fibers.

1. Application: Brush or spray applied as per manufacturer’s application guidelines.

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - Page 8 of 11

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2.4 MIXING

A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration
firestopping manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials,
water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers,
mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality
with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting
performance of work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration

firestop systems to comply with firestop system manufacturer's written instructions and with
the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign
materials that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems.
2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces
capable of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems.
Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that

manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do
not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting
adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would
otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used
to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal
with substrates.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation

instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials
during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and
depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - Page 9 of 11

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible
forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of
firestopping.

C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to
produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Penetration Identification: Identify each penetration firestopping system with legible metal
or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within (150 mm) of
penetration firestopping system edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove
penetrating items or firestopping systems. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type
labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are
placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building

Management of Any Damage."
2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
4. Date of installation.
5. Manufacturer's name.
6. Installer's name.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Engage a qualified independent testing agency approved by the Engineer to perform tests
and inspections. The inspecting agency will report observations promptly and in writing to
Contractor and Engineer

B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of

testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after
inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.

D. Manufacturer’s Technical Representative: provide technical representatives from

firestopping manufacturer to inspect the work being performed by installer and provide
report to Engineer of compliance with their requirements.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and
with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping
manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - Page 10 of 11

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that
penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut
out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials
to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

END OF SECTION 078413

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - Page 11 of 11

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

SECTION 078446 - FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions.

2. Joints at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections (fire safing insulation).
3. Joints in smoke barriers.
4. External cladding cavity fire and smoke barriers.

B. Related Sections: For guidance, related requirements may be specified in other Sections
such as, but not necessarily limited to:

1. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for floor-to-wall joints indicated as

perimeter fire-containment systems between perimeter edge of fire-resistance-rated
floor assemblies and back of non-fire-resistance-rated exterior curtain walls.
2. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for systems installed in openings in
walls and floors with and without penetrating items.
3. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for non-fire-resistive joint sealants.
4. Division 07 Section "Expansion Control" for fire-resistive joint systems consisting of
metal frames and covers or flexible seals.
5. Division 08 Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls and Window Walls".

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit in compliance with Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures.”

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1. Comply with Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

C. Product Schedule: For each fire-resistive joint system. Include location and design
designation of qualified testing agency.

1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified

testing agency's illustration for a particular fire-resistive joint system condition,
submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by fire-resistive joint system
manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-
resistance-rated assembly.

FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - Page 1 of 10

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

D. Shop Drawings: For each fire-resistive joint system, show each kind of construction
condition in which joints are installed; also show relationships to adjoining construction.
Include fire-resistive joint system design designation of testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that demonstrates compliance with
requirements for each condition indicated.

1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting

agency that is applicable to each fire-resistive joint system configuration for
construction and penetrating items.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data:

1. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with
project name, addresses, names of Engineer and Employers, and other information
specified.
2. For Testing Agency Qualifications include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

B. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating fire-resistive joint systems have been
installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for fire-resistive joint systems. Include submittal of UL laboratory test
reports or qualified engineering judgment/laboratory assessments confirming compliance of
each fire assembly with the specified required criteria.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

1.5 LOCAL REGULATIONS AND CODES

A. Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, and regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.

1. Obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Comply with Egyptian Codes and Standards requirements and latest circulars.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Comply with Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements.”

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems

similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As
applicable, procure products from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements,
warranty requirements, and technical or factory-authorized service representative
requirements. Experience: Minimum of 10 years.

FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - Page 2 of 10

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

C. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing fire-resistive joint systems similar

in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the
necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified
requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its fire-resistive joint system products to
Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on
buyer.

1. Installer shall be approved in writing by manufacturer.

2. Shall be approved by Authorities Having Jurisdiction

D. Source Limitations: Obtain all system components and accessories from single source from
single manufacturer. If some components are not produced by system manufacture,
obtaining these components from other sources may be approved subject to
recommendation in writing by system manufacturer provided it does not negate the
warranty. Submit for Engineer’s approval.

E. Undivided Responsibility: Products in Division 07 sections “Penetration Firestopping” and

“Fire-Resistive Joint Systems” shall be the products of one single Manufacturer, and
executed by the same approved authorized Installer.

F. Mock-Ups:

1. Install mock-ups for each fire-resistive joint system, construction joints, and
perimeter fire-resistive joint systems, as required to maintain each fire-resistive rated
assembly.

a. System Components: Include as necessary to illustrate compete system for

each hourly rating.
b. UL Classified System: Attach drawing and instructions required for installation
adjacent to each mock-up. Do not remove prior to acceptance of mock-up.
c. Testing and Verification: Determine depth and configuration of each field-
installed fire-resistive joint systems. Destructive testing is not required for
factory-metered systems.

2. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before start of Work.

3. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed Work.

a. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial

Completion may become part of the completed Work.

G. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that comply with

the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements"
Article:

1. Fire-resistance tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A

qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL or another agency performing testing
and follow-up inspection services for fire-resistive joint systems acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per methods indicated in
"Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" Article and comply with the following:

a. Fire-resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified

testing and inspecting agency.

FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - Page 3 of 10

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

b. Fire-resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by reference to

designations listed by the following:

1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."

2) Intertek Group in its "Directory of Listed Building Products."

H. Testing Agency Qualifications: An accredited, independent agency with the experience and
capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E329; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to
authorities.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver fire-resistive joint system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or
packages with qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to
Project and with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and
manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life, curing time, and mixing
instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle materials for fire-resistive joint systems to prevent their deterioration or
damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Comply with Division 01 Section "Warranties".

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer,

Contractor and Installer are jointly and severally liable and agree to repair or replace
component of firestopping in case of failure in materials or workmanship to meet the
specifications within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or

substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system
manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Ventilate fire-resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural

means or, if this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed
according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems.

C. Notify inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of fire-resistive joint system
installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations.

FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - Page 4 of 10

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

D. Do not cover up fire-resistive joint system installations that will become concealed behind
other construction until inspecting agency and building inspector of authorities having
jurisdiction have examined each installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:

1. Specified Technologies, Inc.

2. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division.
3. Hilti.
4. Passive Fire Protection Partners.
5. Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division.

2.2 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

A. Where required, provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist
spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases,
and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which fire-resistive
joint systems are installed. Fire-resistive joint systems shall accommodate building
movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases.

1. Performance Criteria

a. Provide products that upon curing, do not re-emulsify, dissolve, leach,

breakdown or otherwise deteriorate over time from exposure to atmospheric
moisture, ponding water or other forms of moisture characteristic during and
after construction.
b. Provide fire-resistive joint sealants sufficiently flexible to accommodate
movement such as thermal expansion and other normal building movement
without damage to the seal.
c. Provide fire-resistive joint sealants designed to accommodate a specific range
of movement and tested for this purpose in accordance with a cyclic movement
test criteria as outlined in Standards, ASTM E-1399, ASTM E-1966 or ANSI/
UL 2079.
d. Provide fire-resistive joint systems subjected to an air leakage test conducted in
accordance with Standard, ANSI/ UL2079 with published L-Ratings for
ambient and elevated temperatures as evidence of the ability of the fire-
resistive joint system to restrict the movement of smoke.

2. Fire Rated Joint Sealants shall be:

a. UL Classified and listed in systems for fire resistance rating indicated.

b. Factory Mutual (FM) approved.
c. Highly elastomeric and of movement capability to sustain joint movement.

FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - Page 5 of 10

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

3. Mineral Fiber Components shall be:

a. Rockwool.
b. Of density according to listed system.
c. Shall match movement capability of joint systems.
d. Installed in proper orientation to allow compression and rebound.
e. Fit the joint and remain tight.

4. Backer Rods:

a. Shall not degrade the fire rating of joint system.

b. Shall be same type used in fire test.

5. Metal Components: Hot-dip galvanized Steel.

B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide fire-resistive joint

systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079:

1. Joints include those installed in or between fire-resistance-rated walls, floor or

floor/ceiling assemblies and roofs or roof/ceiling assemblies.
2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of
construction they will join.
3. All applied materials shall comply with the requirements listed in the classified UL
systems.
4. Comply with requirements specified in Article; “Fire-Resistive Joint System
Schedule” specified in the end of this Section.

C. Joints at Exterior Curtain-Wall/Floor Intersections: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with

rating determined by ASTM E 119 based on testing at a positive pressure differential of
0.01-inch wg or ASTM E 2307.

1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the floor

assembly.
2. Coordinate with the requirements specified in Division 8 Specifications for Curtain
walls.
3. All applied materials shall comply with the requirements listed in the classified UL
systems.
4. Install between edge of concrete floor and back of curtain wall.
5. Install in tight fit condition with fibers perpendicular to concrete floor.
6. As a minimum shall include:

a. Forming material (mineral fiber insulation batts).

b. Intumescent Fill Material: Spray-applied over top of forming material and
overlapping over concrete floor and curtain wall insulation.

7. Shall satisfy performance requirements specified in this Section.

8. Coordinate with curtain wall insulation as specified in curtain wall Sections.

D. Joints in Smoke Barriers: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with ratings determined per
UL 2079.

1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/ft of joint at 0.30 inch wg at both ambient and
elevated temperatures.
2. All applied materials shall comply with the requirements listed in the classified UL
systems.

FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - Page 6 of 10

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

E. Exposed Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-
developed indexes of less than 25 and 50, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

F. External Cladding Cavities Fire and Smoke Barriers:

1. Cavity fire barriers shall be incorporated into façade design at every floor
horizontally to restrict flame spread vertically and minimum of two such barriers
shall be provided on each side and face of the building.
2. Cavity fire barriers shall be incorporated into façade design at every floor vertically to
restrict flame spread laterally. Cavity fire barriers are in addition to perimeter
firestopping systems.
3. Cavity fire barrier shall be of non-combustible material, in accordance with the
following:

a. EN 13501-1: Class A1 or A2 (Fire classification of construction products and

building elements. Classification using test data from reaction to fire tests).
b. BS 476-4: Non-Combustible (Fire classification of construction products and
building elements. Classification using test data from reaction to fire tests).
c. ISO 1182: Non-Combustible (Fire classification of construction products and
building elements. Classification using test data from reaction to fire tests).

4. The cavity fire barrier shall be 100 mm high band and shall run through insulation
horizontally at each floor level and vertically on each face of façade.
5. The installation shall ensure that compartmentation is established between the façade
skin and the primary substrate and no cavity exists for fire to pass through.
6. The cavity fire barrier shall be mechanically bonded to the primary substrate or
structural frame and extended or compressed behind the finish façade panel to ensure
that no fire path are created between the barrier and substrate or external façade
panel.
7. Where cavity is necessary part of ventilated façade design and cavity needs to be
maintained, an intumescent system, approved and listed for the purpose shall be fixed
as cavity fire barrier band. These intumescent bands serve as fire barriers when
exposed to flames and shall expand to seal the gaps.
8. Cavities and concealed spaces in the structure or fabric of a building shall be sub-
divided or sealed by means of cavity barriers or firestopping to restrict the hidden
spread of smoke and flame both horizontally and vertically, in the cavity behind the
units; and to reduce the effect of fire on fixings.
9. Cavity barriers shall be comprised of non-combustible materials, tested by approved
independent testing and inspection agency or laboratory according to BS 476, Part 20
& BS EN 1366-4 of 120 minutes fire integrity but not less than required by respective
Codes and requirements.
10. Horizontal cavity barriers shall be located at each storey to prevent the spread of fire
from storey to storey. Vertical cavity barriers shall abut compartment walls. Particular
care shall be taken with the detailing of cavity barriers at fixings and at vertical joints
between units in order to avoid gaps in the cavity barriers.

G. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and

forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required.
Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by
the qualified testing agency for systems indicated.

FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - Page 7 of 10

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint systems to
comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following
requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with
adhesion of fill materials.
2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing
optimum bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning
operation.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system

manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine
primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint system from
contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that
would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning
methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire-
resistive joint system's seal with substrates.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written

installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials
during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths
required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible
forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of
fire-resistive joint system.

C. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the
following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achieve
fire-resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints.

FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - Page 8 of 10

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to
produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Joint Identification: Identify joint firestopping systems with legible metal or plastic labels.
Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within (150 mm) of joint edge so
labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove or joint firestopping system. Use mechanical
fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels
to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Fire-Resistive Joint System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building
Management of Any Damage."
2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
3. Designation of applicable testing agency.
4. Date of installation.
5. Manufacturer's name.
6. Installer's name.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspecting Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Where deficiencies are found or fire-resistive joint systems are damaged or removed due to
testing, repair or replace fire-resistive joint systems so they comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing fire-resistive joint systems with other construction only after
inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and
with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint system
manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which joints occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure
fire-resistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove
damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to
produce fire-resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements.

3.7 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire
Resistance Directory" under product Category XHBN or Category XHDG.

B. Where Intertek group-listed systems are indicated, they refer to design numbers in Intertek
group's "Directory of Listed Building Products" under product category Expansion/Seismic
Joints or Firestop Systems.

FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - Page 9 of 10

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

C. Specialty firestopping contracting firm shall prepare fire-resistive joint system schedule to
cover all installation cases included in the project under his sole responsibility for the
approval of Engineer, considering all requirements specified under this Section, Drawings
and the following:

1. Shall satisfy performance requirements specified in this Section.

2. Shall sustain without failure or damage deflection movement of overlying structural
slab or member. Deflection of structural members shall be calculated by Contractor
based on approved structural shop drawings. Submit calculations for overlying
structural deflection.
3. Joint system height shall be calculated by Contractor based on the calculated
deflection of structural members.
4. Minimum Movement Capability: Shall be as required to satisfy the anticipated and
calculated structural movement.
5. Fire rated sealant thickness shall be as listed in the classified systems.
6. Shall determine fire ratings required for each joint firestopping system application
based on the analysis of building code requirements.
7. Shall determine which types of fire-resistance-rated floor or wall assemblies are listed
for use with the joint firestopping systems.
8. Shall determine extent and type of cyclic movement that joint firestopping systems
must withstand to maintain fire resistance of the assemblies in which the joints are
located.

END OF SECTION 078446

FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - Page 10 of 10

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

SECTION 078800 - FIRE CURTAINS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes motorized fire curtain barriers and operators.

1. Fire Rating Duration: As indicated on Drawings for each application.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 26 Sections for electrical service and connections for motor operators,
controls, limit switches, and other powered devices and for system disconnect
switches for motorized shade operation.
2. Division 28 Sections for fire alarms.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit in compliance with Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures.”

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material descriptions,
construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes,
and operating instructions.

1. Comply with Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

2. Motorized Curtains Operators: Include operating instructions.
3. Motors: Show nameplate data, ratings, characteristics, and mounting arrangements.

C. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of curtains. Include elevations, sections, details,
and dimensions not shown in Product Data. Show installation details, mountings,
attachments to other Work, operational clearances, and relationship to adjoining work.

1. Motorized curtains Operators: Show locations and details for installing operator
components, switches, and controls. Indicate motor size, electrical characteristics,
drive arrangement, mounting, and grounding provisions.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, system, and control wiring.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each colored component of each type of fire curtain
indicated.

1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection.

FIRE CURTAINS 078800 - Page 1 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

E. Samples for Verification:

1. Complete, full-size operating unit not less than 400 mm wide for each type of fire
curtain indicated.
2. For the following products:

a. Curtain Material: Not less than 80 mm square, with specified treatments

applied. Mark face of material.

F. Product Certificates: For each type of curtain product, signed by product manufacturer.

G. Qualification Data:

1. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with
project name, addresses, names of Engineer and Employers, and other information
specified.
2. For Testing Agency Qualifications include proof of qualifications in the form of a re-
cent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

H. Maintenance Data: fire curtains to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Methods for maintaining fire curtains and finishes.

2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to
fabrics, finishes, and performance.
3. Operating hardware.
4. Motorized curtain operator.

I. Test Reports: Submit test report by an approved testing laboratory. Test report shall include
manufacturer name and contacts in addition to tested product name and detailed description.

1.4 LOCAL REGULATIONS AND CODES

A. Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, and regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.

1. Obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Comply with Egyptian Codes and Standards requirements and latest circulars.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Comply with Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements.”

B. Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide all curtains with fire resistance rating required to comply
with governing regulations which are inspected, tested, listed and labeled by an approved
independent laboratory and complying with NFPA 80 for class of opening. Provide units
tested, approved and labeled under the UL 10B, UL 10D and UL 1784 standards. Provide
testing agency label permanently fastened to each fire curtain assembly as evidence of
product compliance.

FIRE CURTAINS 078800 - Page 2 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems

similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As
applicable, procure products from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements,
warranty requirements, and technical or factory-authorized service representative
requirements. Experience: Minimum of 10 years.

D. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed installation of fire

curtains similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose
work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Testing Agency Qualifications: An accredited, independent agency with the experience and
capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E329; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to
authorities.

F. Source Limitations: Obtain fire curtains through one source from a single manufacturer.

G. Oversize Assemblies: Where units exceed the testing laboratory’s label size, an Oversize
Certificate label issued by approved independent laboratory shall be provided and
permanently fastened to each fire curtain assembly as evidence of product compliance.
Oversize assemblies requiring the joining of curtain sections together on site by the installer
must require documented field certification by approved independent laboratory.

H. Quality System: The system manufacturer shall be a firm of assessed capability under ISO
9001 1987 for the design, manufacture, installation and commissioning of Automatic fire
curtain.

F. Seismic Performance:

1. Seismic Loads: Design as per ECP 201-2013 considering the following:

a. PGA=0.15g, Importance factor =1.0, R for the tower = 5.0., Soil class= B,
Service seismic interstory allowable drift = 0.01.

G. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to Engineer, and marked for intended
use.

H. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.

2. Build mockups in the location and of the size as directed by Engineer.

3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Comply with Division 01 Section "Warranties".

B. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Employer
of other rights Employer may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and
shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.

FIRE CURTAINS 078800 - Page 3 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

C. Special Warranty: Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer Installer and
Contractor are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace, without
limitations, all or any part of the fire curtains system which fails or becomes defective in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not
limited to, the following:

1. Deterioration of finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.

2. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
3. Failure of operating components to function normally.

D. Warranty Period: five years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver curtains in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, fire-test-
response characteristics, and location of installation using same room designations indicated
on Drawings and in a window treatment schedule.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire curtains until construction and wet and dirty
finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended
use.

B. Field Measurements: Where roller fire curtain are indicated to fit to other construction,
verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and
indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units'
operation hardware throughout the entire operating range. Notify Engineer of discrepancies.
Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE CURTAINS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:

1. Coopers
2. Colt
3. Bradley Lomas Electrolok Ltd (BLE).

2.2 FIRE CURTAIN

A. Curtain: Shall be reinforced fabric curtain, consisting of a fire resistant fabric with integral
stainless steel wire weave. Curtain shall be at minimum no less than 0.54 mm thick.

FIRE CURTAINS 078800 - Page 4 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

B. Egress Door: Shall be an integral fire and smoke rated, manually operable soft surface
swinging type egress door. The swinging egress door shall be readily operable from the
egress side without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort and shall comply with
opening force requirements as outlined under the International Building Code (IBC).

C. Bottom Bar: Shall consist of a tubular member formed to fit curtain, provide stiffness, limit
deflection and allow for a tight fitting closure. Bottom bar shall be designed of adequate size
and weight to keep the curtain fully extended, taut and level when the unit is activated to the
self-closing position while preventing any deflection caused by the building’s air pressure
currents.

D. Guide Assemblies: Each guide assembly shall be fabricated of a steel mounting adjustment
angle or channel with an integral pressure retaining side guide with a minimum 90mm
depth. Each pressure retaining guide shall be fitted with UL approved and classified smoke
seals.

E. Mounting Brackets: Fabricated of minimum 14 gauge steel plates, brackets shall be

provided to house and support ends of the barrel assembly.

F. Hood: Shall be provided to entirely enclose curtain and barrel assembly. Hood shall be
fabricated of minimum 18 gauge galvanized steel formed to match brackets. Top and bottom
shall be bent and reinforced for stiffness. Hood shall be fitted with UL approved and
classified smoke seals.

G. Barrel Assembly: Fabricated of structural quality carbon steel seamless pipe of sufficient
size and diameter to house operating motor drive, support curtain assembly and limit
horizontal deflection of the fire and smoke curtain assembly.

H. Fail-Safe Release Device: A fail-safe release device shall be built into the motor drive unit
as an integral part of the release mechanism. When power is interrupted to the release
mechanism by an alarm condition, the fire and smoke curtain shall automatically self-close.
In the event of power failure the time delay shall prevent the fire and smoke curtain from
closing for a predetermined programmable period of 30 minutes, unless there is an alarm
condition at which point the fire and smoke curtain shall immediately self-close. Once the
predetermined programmable period of 30 minutes has lapsed, the fire and smoke curtain
shall self-close. Once power has been restored and the alarm condition has been cleared, the
release mechanism shall automatically reset and the fire and smoke curtain shall
immediately become operable.

I. Easy Trip Test Feature: The fire and smoke curtain shall be designed so that it may be trip
tested simply by activating the True-Test switch. By turning the True-Test switch to the
“off” position, the draft curtain shall automatically self-close. Once the draft curtain
assembly has satisfactorily closed, it shall be reset simply by turning the True-Test switch
back to the “on” position. No ladders, tools or special equipment shall be required to test or
reset the fire and smoke curtain.

J. Finish: After completion of fabrication, clean all metal surfaces to remove dirt and
chemically treat to provide for paint adhesion. Hood, bottom bar and guide assembles shall
be of a powder coat finish, white in color.

FIRE CURTAINS 078800 - Page 5 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2.3 TRACKLESS FIRE CURTAIN

A. Fire curtain: shall comprise of a pleated fire resistant fabric, incorporating an integral
stainless steel reinforced mesh for impact resistance. This fabric shall be fixed at the top
edge inside the head box enclosure and at the bottom edge in a bottom tray enclosure.

B. Headbox: The assembly with the pleated fabric shall be housed in a 1.6 mm galvanized mild
steel headbox which shall be fixed to the building structure as tested.

C. Fail-Safe Release Device: A fail-safe release device shall be built into the motor drive unit
as an integral part of the release mechanism. When power is interrupted to the release
mechanism by an alarm condition, the fire and smoke curtain shall automatically self-close.
In the event of power failure the time delay shall prevent the fire and smoke curtain from
closing for a predetermined programmable period of 30 minutes, unless there is an alarm
condition at which point the fire and smoke curtain shall immediately self-close. Once the
predetermined programmable period of 30 minutes has lapsed, the fire and smoke curtain
shall self-close. Once power has been restored and the alarm condition has been cleared, the
release mechanism shall automatically reset and the fire and smoke curtain shall
immediately become operable.

D. Guide Assemblies: No side and corner guide rails.

2.4 MOTORIZED OPERATORS

A. General: Provide factory-assembled motorized fire curtain operation systems designed for
lifting curtains of type, size, weight, construction, use, and operation frequency indicated.
Provide operation systems of size and capacity and with features, characteristics, and
accessories suitable for Project conditions and recommended by curtains manufacturer,
complete with electric motors and factory-prewired motor controls, power disconnect
switches, enclosures protecting controls and all operating parts, and accessories required for
reliable operation without malfunction. Include wiring from motor controls to motors.
Coordinate operator wiring requirements and electrical characteristics with the building
electrical system.

B. Motor Drive Unit: UL-approved or -recognized, asynchronous, complying with

NEMA MG 1. The motor shall contain the necessary drive mechanisms, a mechanical
epicyclic gearbox retarder, electromechanical distance travel/limit switches, linked to an
internal 24Volt dc electromagnetic brake with regenerative braking system which allows the
barrier to remain in the retracted position with all power removed from the motor unit. The
motor(s) are fixed externally to the head box enclosure and are linked to the drive shaft via a
sprocket connected by a chain drive.

1. Operating Features: Fire curtain shall be closed automatically by direct signal from
the fire alarm system.
2. Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Motor Characteristics: Single phase, 220 V, 50 Hz, unless otherwise indicated.

FIRE CURTAINS 078800 - Page 6 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTRUCTION

A. Installer of fire curtain, prior to installation, shall receive confirmation from the Contractor
that the walls and ceilings have been painted and the floors have been sealed and/or cleaned,
and the building dried in. Fire curtain installer shall be scheduled prior to fixtures and
shelving being installed. This subcontractor shall report any adverse conditions to the
Contractor in writing with a copy to the Employer.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be performed by skilled technicians in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.

B. Fire curtain shall be located in accordance with Engineer's drawings. Fire curtain shall be
installed true and plumb at parallel and perpendicular lines to the building walls.

3.3 FINISH

A. EMT tubing shall be galvanized steel. All verticals, tees, and connectors shall be painted to
match fabric color.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust fire curtains to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction
throughout entire operational range.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean fire curtains surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer

and Installer that ensure that roller fire curtains are without damage or deterioration at time
of Substantial Completion.

C. Replace damaged fire curtains that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Engineer,
before time of Substantial Completion.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Demonstration and Training."

END OF SECTION 078800

FIRE CURTAINS 078800 - Page 7 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Nonstaining silicone joint sealants

2. Silyl-terminated polyether (STPE) joint sealants
3. Urethane joint sealants
4. Immersible joint sealants
5. Mildew-resistant joint sealants
6. Preformed joint sealants
7. Latex joint sealants
8. Acoustical joint sealants

B. Related Sections: For guidance, related requirements may be specified in other Sections
such as, but not necessarily limited to:

1. Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for sealing joints in fire-

resistance-rated construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Trafficable Sealant: To qualify for traffic use under ASTM C 920 requirements, elastomeric
sealants must demonstrate a Shore A hardness of not less than 25 or more than 50.

B. Low Modulus: Tensile strength of 310 kPa or less.

C. Medium Modulus: Tensile strength of not less than 310 kPa or more than 517 kPa.
Movement capabilities of ±50%.

D. High Modulus: Tensile strength of more 517 kPa. Joint movement is limited to ±25% or
less.

1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers,

for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.

1. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation
techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint
substrates.

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - Page 1 of 14

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each kind of material, including joint
substrates, shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous
materials.
3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the
Work.
4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for
corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers.
5. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation
data that are based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products
for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching
those submitted.

B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion
to Project joint substrates as follows:

1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by
Engineer.
2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:

a. Each kind of sealant and joint substrate indicated.

3. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be
erected.
4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical
representative present.

a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant

Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail
Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.

1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate

separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite
side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include
data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For
sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.
6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing
adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with
requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere
to joint substrates during testing.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit in compliance with Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures.”

B. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

1. Comply with Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured
sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - Page 2 of 14

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples
with joint sealants in 13-mm- wide joints formed between two 150-mm- long strips of
material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

E. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.

2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
3. Joint-sealant formulation.
4. Joint-sealant color.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Manufacturer, Installer and testing agency to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include lists of five completed projects (minimum) of a similar
nature carried out successfully with project names and addresses, names and addresses of
engineers and employers, and any other information specified or required by Engineer.

B. Installer Certificates: Signed by product manufacturer certifying that installer is approved,

authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install his products.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed

by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements. Test report
shall include manufacturer name and contacts in addition to tested product name and
detailed description.

D. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

1.7 LOCAL REGULATIONS AND CODES

A. Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, and regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.

1. Obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Comply with Egyptian Codes and Standards requirements and latest circulars.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Comply with Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements.”

B. Manufacturer: A firm experienced in successfully producing work similar to that indicated

for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance, and with sufficient
production capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the Work.

1. Experience: Minimum of 10 years.

C. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for

installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single
manufacturer.

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - Page 3 of 14

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

E. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.

1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to

ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
2. Test according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance with
requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and cohesion under
cyclic movement, adhesion-in-peel, and indentation hardness.

F. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are
indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation
methods specified in this Section.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. General: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original packaging with label indicating

pertinent information identifying the item. Store materials in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions in a protected dry location off ground. Do not open packaging
nor remove labels until time of installation.

1. Label information to include manufacturer, product name and designation, color,

expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for
multicomponent materials.
2. Storage material in compliance with manufacturers' recommendations to prevent their
deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or
other causes.

1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by
joint-sealant manufacturer.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from
joint substrates.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Comply with Division 01 Section "Warranties".

B. Warranty: Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer and

Contractor are jointly and severally liable and agree to repair or replace, without limitations,
all or any part of the elastomeric joint sealant assembly that do not comply with
performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty
period. Failure includes, but is not limited to: water penetration, adhesive and cohesive
failures, deterioration in sealants; other than due to normal ageing and weathering; and any
other defects in other components of the work.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - Page 4 of 14

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

C. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric

joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant

manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused
by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric
contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. This specification section is nonproprietary. Products named are intended to give the
required minimum acceptable performance of sealants needed. Other products of equal or
better performance may be accepted by the Engineer provided the specified procedures for
submissions are applied.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field
experience.

B. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements
indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing
ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint
substrates.

C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to

porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248
and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

D. Trafficable Sealants: in accordance with ASTM C920, trafficable sealants grade T shall
have a hardness reading, after being properly cured, of not less than 25 or more than 50
when tested in accordance with ASTM C 661.as recommended by ASTM C920. Do not use
silicone sealants for such applications.

E. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in
repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with FDA Regulation
21 CFR 177.2600.

F. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for Use I for
joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone
testing according to ASTM C 1247 and qualify for the length of exposure indicated by
reference to ASTM C 920 for Class 1 or 2. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized
water, unless otherwise indicated.

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - Page 5 of 14

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

G. Suitability As Sanitary Sealant: Shall be designed and recommended for sealing joints
around shower-tub enclosures, tubs, ablution seats, sinks, urinals whirlpools, plumbing
fixtures, rimless sinks and tile grouting:

1. Testing Standards:

a. ASTM C 920.

H. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each
liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

2.4 NONSTAINING SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Nonstaining Joint Sealants: No staining of substrates when tested according to

ASTM C 1248.

B. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT: Nonstaining, single-component, nonsag, plus 50

percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone
joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 795.

b. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2.
c. Pecora Corporation: 895NST.

2.5 SILYL-TERMINATED POLYETHER (STPE) JOINT SEALANTS

A. STPE, S, NS, 50, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent
movement capability, nontraffic-use, silyl-terminated polyether joint sealant; ASTM C 920,
Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC; MasterSeal® NP 100™.

2.6 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Urethane, M, P, 25, T, NT: Multicomponent, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25

percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant;
ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - Page 6 of 14

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

a. Tremco Incorporated; THC 900/901.

b. Pecora Corporation: DynaTrol® II-SG.
c. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC; MasterSeal SL 2.
d. Bostik, Inc.: Chem-Calk 555-SL.

2.7 IMMERSIBLE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Immersible Joint Sealants. Suitable for immersion in liquids; ASTM C 1247, Class 1 or 2;
tested in deionized water unless otherwise indicated

B. Urethane, Immersible, S, NS, 50, T, NT, I: Immersible, single-component, nonsag, plus 50

percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane
joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Uses T, NT, and I.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Tremco Incorporated; Dymonic® 100.

C. Urethane, Immersible, S, P, 50, T, NT, I: Immersible, single-component, pourable, plus 50

percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane
joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 50, Uses T, NT, and I.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 45 SSL.

2.8 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS

A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with

fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth.

B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-
component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-
use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786-M White.

b. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200.
c. GE Construction Sealants: Sanitary SCS1700.
d. Pecora Corporation: 898NST.

C. STPE, Mildew Resistant, S, NS, 50, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component, nonsag,

plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, silyl-terminated
polyether joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC; MasterSeal® NP 100™.

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - Page 7 of 14

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2.9 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Preformed Silicone Joint Sealants: Manufacturer's standard sealant consisting of precured

low-modulus silicone extrusion, in sizes to fit joint widths indicated, combined with a
neutral-curing silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 123 Silicone Seal.

b. Pecora Corporation; Sil-Span.

B. Preformed Foam Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, open-

cell foam sealant manufactured from urethane foam with minimum density of 160 kg/m3
and impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent. Factory produce in
precompressed sizes in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated; coated on one side
with a pressure-sensitive adhesive and covered with protective wrapping.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dayton Superior Specialty Chemicals; Polytite Standard.

b. Emseal Joint Systems, Ltd.; Emseal 25V.

2.10 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex® 834.

b. Pecora Corporation: Tilt-SealTM.

2.11 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex

sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound
transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated
by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Pecora Corporation; AIS-919.

b. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Acoustical Sealant.
c. GE Construction Sealants: RCS Acoustical.

2.12 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with
joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications
indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - Page 8 of 14

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface
skin) and other types as recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application
indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to
producing optimum sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or
joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

2.13 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion

of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-
substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of

sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of
staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and
formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and
surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
joint-sealant performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following
requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion
of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings
tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer),
old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and
frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a
combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of
developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after
cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free
compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - Page 9 of 14

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that
do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of
joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal.
b. Glass.
c. Porcelain enamel.
d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or

as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply
primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to
areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer
with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such
contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape
immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for

products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of
joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at
position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative
to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application
and replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between
sealants and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - Page 10 of 14

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to
form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to
ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do
not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.
4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193.

G. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal

construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a
continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at
perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's
written recommendations.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 10 tests for the first 300 m of joint length for each kind of sealant and
joint substrate.
b. Perform 1 test for each 300 m of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor
per elevation.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint
Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in
ASTM C 1521.

a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate

separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side.
Repeat procedure for opposite side.

3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:

a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.

b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified
requirements.
c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to
joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test
each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if
adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.

4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were
installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether
joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant
configuration, and sealant dimensions.
5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same
procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are
clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - Page 11 of 14

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from
testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory.
Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other
requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with
indicated requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants
and of products in which joints occur.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so
sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite
such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are
indistinguishable from original work.

3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint Sealant Application: Exterior and interior joints in vertical surfaces:

1. Joint Locations:

a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete.

b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
c. Joints in stone cladding.
d. Tile control and expansion joints.
e. Joints between metal panels.
f. Joints between different materials listed above.
g. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors windows
and louvers.
h. Control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces.
i. Other similar joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Sealant Type:

a. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT.

3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range of colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior and interior joints in horizontal surfaces:

1. Joint Locations:

a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.

b. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete paving units.
c. Joints in stone paving and flooring units, including steps.
d. Tile control and expansion joints.
e. Joints between different materials listed above.

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - Page 12 of 14

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

f. Other similar joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Sealant Type:

a. Urethane, M, P, 25, T, NT.

3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range of colors.

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior and interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces subject to
water immersion.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Joints in horizontal traffic surfaces subject to water immersion.

b. Joints in water tanks, planters and fountains.
c. Other similar joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant:

a. Urethane, Immersible, S, P, 50, T, NT, I.

b. Urethane, Immersible, S, NS, 50, T, NT, I.

3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range of colors.

D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces not subject to significant

movement:

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.

b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors
windows and elevator entrances.
c. Other similar joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Sealant Type:

a. Acrylic latex.

3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range of colors.

E. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal

nontraffic surfaces:

1. Joint Locations:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
b. Other similar joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Sealant Type:

a. Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, NS, 25, NT.

b. STPE, Mildew Resistant, S, NS, 50, NT.

3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range of colors.

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - Page 13 of 14

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

F. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal

nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Location:

a. Acoustical joints where indicated.

b. Other joints as indicated.

2. Sealant Type:

a. Acoustical.

3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.

END OF SECTION 079200

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - Page 14 of 14

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

SECTION 079500 - EXPANSION CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies interior and exterior expansion control systems, with and without fire
barriers that accommodate building expansion joint movement resulting from causes such as
thermal change, seismic force, or wind sway.

B. This Section includes the following:

1. Expansion control systems.

C. Related Sections: For guidance, related requirements may be specified in other Sections
such as, but not necessarily limited to:

1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for cast-in architectural-joint-system

frames furnished, but not installed, in this Section.
2. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for masonry wall joint systems.
3. Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for liquid-applied joint sealants in
fire-resistive building joints.
4. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for liquid-applied joint sealants.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Maximum Joint Width: Widest linear gap a joint system tolerates and in which it performs
its designed function without damaging its functional capabilities.

B. Construction joint: The surface where two successive placements of concrete meet, across
which it may be desirable to achieve bond and through which reinforcement may be
continuous.

C. Contraction Joint or Control joint: Formed, sawed, or tooled groove in a concrete structure
to create a weakened plane and regulate the location of cracking resulting from the
dimensional change of different parts of the structure.

D. Expansion joint:

1. A separation provided between adjoining parts of a structure to allow movement

where expansion is likely to exceed contraction;
2. A separation between pavement slabs on grade, filled with a compressible filler
material;
3. An isolation joint intended to allow independent movement between adjoining parts.

EXPANSION CONTROL 079500 - Page 1 of 15

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

E. Isolation joint: A separation between adjoining parts of a concrete structure, usually a

vertical plane, at a designated location such as to interfere least with performance of the
structure, yet such as to allow relative movement in three directions and avoid formation of
cracks elsewhere in the concrete and through which all or part of the bonded reinforcement
is interrupted.

F. Minimum Joint Width: Narrowest linear gap a joint system tolerates and in which it
performs its designed function without damaging its functional capabilities.

G. Movement Capability: Value obtained from the difference between widest and narrowest
widths of a joint opening typically expressed in numerical values (mm or inches) or a
percentage (plus or minus) of nominal value of joint width.

H. Nominal Joint Width: The width of the linear opening specified in practice and in which the
joint system is installed. For joint widths refer to TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile
Installation.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit in compliance with Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures.”

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1. Comply with Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

C. Shop Drawings: For each expansion control system specified. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, splices, blockout requirement, attachments to other work, and line
diagrams showing entire route of each expansion control system. Where expansion control
systems change planes, provide isometric or clearly detailed drawing depicting how
components interconnect.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of expansion control system indicated.

1. Include manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors and finishes
available for each exposed metal and elastomeric seal material.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of expansion control system indicated, full width
by 150 mm long in size.

F. Placement Drawings: Include line diagrams showing plans, entire route of each joint system
and elevations. Where joint systems change planes, provide isometric or clearly detailed
drawing depicting how components interconnect.

G. Qualification Data:

1. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with
project name, addresses, names of Engineer and Employers, and other information
specified.
2. For Testing Agency Qualifications include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

H. Product Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of the supplier. Include the
following information in tabular form:

EXPANSION CONTROL 079500 - Page 2 of 15

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

1. Manufacturer and model number for each expansion control system.

2. Expansion control system location cross-referenced to Drawings.
3. Nominal joint width.
4. Movement capability.
5. Classification as thermal or seismic.
6. Materials, colors, and finishes.
7. Product options.
8. Fire-resistance ratings.

I. Warranty: Sample copy of manufacturer's proposed warranty complying with specified

requirements, and stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions of warranty.

J. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for current products. Test report shall include manufacturer name and
contacts in addition to tested product name and detailed description.

1.5 LOCAL REGULATIONS AND CODES

A. Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, and regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.

1. Obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Comply with Egyptian Codes and Standards requirements and latest circulars.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Comply with Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements.”

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems

similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As
applicable, procure products from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements,
warranty requirements, and technical or factory-authorized service representative
requirements. Experience: Minimum of 10 years.

C. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain expansion control systems through one source from a single
manufacturer.

E. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of

expansion control systems and are based on the specific systems indicated. Refer to
Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Engineer, except with
Engineer's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive
explanatory data to Engineer for review.

F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An accredited, independent agency with the experience and
capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E329; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to
authorities.

EXPANSION CONTROL 079500 - Page 3 of 15

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

G. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockups as directed by Engineer.

2. Build mockups for each form and finish of expansion control not less than 600 mm in
length.
3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Comply with Division 01 Section "Warranties".

B. Expansion Control Systems Warranty: Provide complete warranty in which Manufacturer,

Contractor and Installer are jointly and severally liable and agree to repair or replace without
limitations, all or any part of the expansion control systems specified in this section which
fails or becomes defective in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. All expansion control systems are guaranteed to be of good material and

workmanship and free from defects that render it unserviceable for the use for which
it is intended.
2. Warranty shall also include:

a. Installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of

defective metal fabrications.
b. Metal, sealants, fasteners, and all other components of architectural joint
systems specified in this section.

3. Failure includes, but is not limited to:

a. deterioration in expansion control systems materials and coatings; other than

due to normal ageing and weathering; and any defects in glass, sealants,
fixings, coverings and other components of the work.
b. Failure to withstand structural movement.

4. To be protected by the guarantee, expansion control systems products must be stored

suitable dry enclosure recommended and approved by the manufacturer of ornamental
railings items.
5. Warranty Period: five (5) years Total Warranty from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. General: Provide expansion control systems of design, basic profile, materials, and
operation indicated. Provide units with capability to accommodate variations in adjacent
surfaces.

1. Furnish units in longest practicable lengths to minimize field splicing. Install with
hairline mitered corners where expansion control systems change direction or abut
other materials.

EXPANSION CONTROL 079500 - Page 4 of 15

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2. Include factory-fabricated closure materials and transition pieces, T-joints, corners,

curbs, cross-connections, and other accessories as required to provide continuous
expansion control systems.

B. Coordination: Coordinate installation of exterior wall and soffit expansion control systems
with roof expansion control systems to ensure that wall transitions are watertight.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide expansion control system and

fire-barrier assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per
UL 2079 or ASTM E 1966 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.

1. Floor- to-Floor Assemblies: All assemblies are fire rated.

2. Soffit-to-Soffit Assemblies: Where indicated on Drawings or mandated by applicable
fire code.
3. Floor-to-Wall Assemblies: All assemblies are fire rated.
4. Wall-to-Wall Assemblies: Assemblies in fire rated walls are to be fire rated.
5. Fire resistance rating of joint assembly is to be identical to fire rating of the
construction to which joint assembly will be installed.
6. Hose Stream Test: Wall-to-wall and wall-to-ceiling assemblies shall be subjected to
hose stream testing.

B. Seismic Performance: Expansion control systems shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to the following:

1. The term "withstand" means "the system will remain in place without separation of
any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the system will be fully
operational after the seismic event."
2. Seismic Loads: Design as per ECP 201-2013 considering the following:

a. PGA=0.15g, Importance factor =1.0, R for the tower = 5.0., Soil class= B,
Service seismic interstory allowable drift = 0.01.

C. Expansion Joint Design Criteria:

1. Type of Movement: Thermal, Wind sway.

a. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings.

b. Minimum Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings.
c. Maximum Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Type of Movement: Seismic, where indicated or confirmed with structural Engineer.

a. Joint Movement: As indicated on Drawings.

2.3 EXPANSION CONTROL SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. General: Provide expansion control systems of design, basic profile, materials, and
operation indicated. Provide units with capability to accommodate variations in adjacent
surfaces.

EXPANSION CONTROL 079500 - Page 5 of 15

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

1. Furnish units in longest practicable lengths to minimize field splicing. Install with
hairline mitered corners where joint changes direction or abuts other materials.
2. Include factory-fabricated closure materials and transition pieces, tee-joints, corners,
curbs, cross-connections, and other accessories as required to provide continuous
joint systems.

B. Design expansion control systems for the following size and movement characteristics:

1. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Movement Capability: ± 50 %, minimum as required for each application.
3. Type of Movement: Thermal and Seismic.
4. Load Capacity: For floor to floor expansion joint assemblies; the following loads
shall be calculated and considered prior to selection of expansion assemblies installed
in different areas based on the expected imposed loads of different types of moving
vehicles, trucks and equipment:

a. Uniform Load.
b. Concentrated Load.
c. Maximum Deflection.

C. Fire Barriers: Provide fire barriers as follows:

1. In all floor-to-floor and floor-to-wall expansion joint assemblies within suspended

structural slabs.
2. In all wall-to-wall expansion joint assemblies in fire-rated walls.
3. Where indicated on Drawings.

D. Water Stops: Provide water stops as follows:

1. In all floor-to-floor and floor-to-wall expansion joint assemblies.

2. In all wall-to-wall expansion joint assemblies within exterior walls at building
periphery.

E. Structural Opening Width: Shall be as indicated on Structural Drawings.

2.4 EXPANSION CONTROL SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:

1. Construction Specialties, Inc.

2. JointMaster/InPro Corporation.
3. Nystrom, Inc.
4. Balco, Inc.
5. WABO-BASF.
6. Emseal.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain expansion control systems from single source from single
manufacturer.

EXPANSION CONTROL 079500 - Page 6 of 15

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2.5 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: ASTM B 221M, Alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B 209M, Alloy 6061-
T6 for sheet and plate.

1. Apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum surfaces to be placed

in contact with cementitious materials.

B. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304 for plates, sheet, and
strips.

1. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.

C. Elastomeric Seals: ASTM E 1783; preformed elastomeric membranes or extrusions to be

installed in metal frames.

D. Compression Seals: ASTM E 1612; preformed elastomeric extrusions having an internal

baffle system and designed to function under compression.

E. Cellular Foam Seals: Extruded, compressible foam designed to function under

compression.

F. Elastomeric Concrete: Modified epoxy or polyurethane extended into a prepackaged

aggregate blend, specifically designed for bonding to concrete substrates.

G. Fire Barriers: Any material or material combination, when fire tested after cycling,
designated to resist the passage of flame and hot gases through a movement joint and to
meet performance criteria for required fire-resistance rating.

H. Moisture Barrier: Flexible elastomeric material, EPDM, minimum 45 mils thick.

1. Drain-Tube Assemblies: Where indicated on Drawings equip moisture barrier with

drain tubes and seals to direct collected moisture to drain.

I. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged,

nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency
suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

J. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard anchors, clips, fasteners, set screws, spacers, and
other accessories compatible with material in contact, as indicated or required for complete
installations.

2.6 EXPANSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain expansion control systems from single source from single
manufacturer.

B. Floor-to-Floor Joint Systems:

1. Recessed type that allows deferred installation of floor finish.

2. Fully integrated seamless floor system
3. Frame Material: Mill finish aluminum.
4. Extruded aluminum base frames and center plate
5. The aluminum center plate is an extruded modular section and is retained by a series
of channel turnbars.

EXPANSION CONTROL 079500 - Page 7 of 15

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

6. Backer rod and sealant to be installed between the frame and the center plate.
7. Fire resistance rating is to be not less than that of adjacent construction.
8. Height: To be coordinated with height of finish flooring.
9. Fire Barrier: As specified in Clause 2.5.
10. Moisture Barrier: As specified in Clause 2.5.
11. Movement Type and Capability: As specified before in this Section.
12. Opening Width: As indicated on Structural Drawings.

C. Floor-to-Floor Joint Systems for Parking, Platform and Where indicated:

1. General: Expansion joint system shall be specially developed for installation on

parking structures to insure completely watertight cover system and sustain against
imposed loads of moving vehicles of different types.

2. Type: Epoxy-bonded seal.

a. Seal Material: EPDM.

1) Color: Black.

3. Load Capacity:

a. Uniform Load: (976 kg/sq. m).

b. Concentrated Load: (907 kg).
c. Maximum Deflection: (3.2 mm).

4. Attachment Method: Compressed, epoxy adhered.

5. Load Capacity: Heavy duty.
6. Winged seal systems that utilize elastomeric concrete are not acceptable.
7. Fire Barrier: As specified in Clause 2.5.
8. Moisture Barrier: As specified in Clause 2.5.
9. Fire-Resistance Rating: Provide joint system and fire-barrier assembly with a rating
not less than that of adjacent construction.
10. Opening Width: As indicated on Structural Drawings.
11. Movement Type and Capability: As specified before in this Section.

D. Plaza deck Joint systems below fill where indicated:

1. Heavy-duty, double-celled, extruded, thermoplastic rubber gland flanked by integral

side flashing flanges:
2. The system components shall be combined in the field with EPDM waterproofing
membrane and accessories offered by the waterproofing membrane manufacturer.
Coordinate the installation of expansion control system with waterproofing
manufacturer. System shall be approved in writing by EPDM waterproofing
membrane manufacturer.
3. Where indicated provide aluminum protection plate fixed from one side.
4. Fire Barrier: As specified in Clause 2.5.
5. Moisture Barrier: As specified in Clause 2.5.
6. Fire-Resistance Rating: Provide joint system and fire-barrier assembly with a rating
not less than that of adjacent construction.
7. Opening Width: As indicated on Structural Drawings.
8. Movement Type and Capability: As specified before in this Section.

E. Floor-to-Floor Joint Systems:

EXPANSION CONTROL 079500 - Page 8 of 15

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

1. Type: Cover plate.

a. Exposed Metal: Aluminum.

1) Finish: Brushed, non-slip finish.

2. Cover Plate Design: Plain

3. Attachment Method: Mechanical anchors.
4. Load Capacity: Heavy duty.
5. Fire-Resistance Rating: Provide joint system and fire-barrier assembly with a rating
not less than that of adjacent construction.
6. Fire Barrier: As specified in Clause 2.5.
7. Moisture Barrier: As specified in Clause 2.5.
8. Opening Width: As indicated on Structural Drawings.
9. Movement Type and Capability: As specified before in this Section.

F. Interior Wall to Wall Joint System:

1. Type: Center cover plate.

a. Exposed Metal: Aluminum.

2. Finish: Colored powder coating to match adjacent finishes as indicated or selected.

3. Fire-Resistance Rating: Provide joint system and fire-barrier assembly with a rating
not less than that of adjacent construction.
4. Fire Barrier: As specified in Clause 2.5.
5. Moisture Barrier: As specified in Clause 2.5.
6. Opening Width: As indicated on Structural Drawings.
7. Movement Type and Capability: As specified before in this Section.

G. Interior Wall to Wall Joint System:

1. Type: Flat seal.

a. Exposed Metal: Aluminum.

1) Finish: Mill.

2. Seal Material: Santoprene.

a. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.

3. Fire-Resistance Rating: Provide joint system and fire-barrier assembly with a rating
not less than that of adjacent construction.
4. Fire Barrier: As specified in Clause 2.5.
5. Moisture Barrier: As specified in Clause 2.5.
6. Opening Width: As indicated on Structural Drawings.
7. Movement Type and Capability: As specified before in this Section.

H. Interior Wall and Ceiling Joint System (Wall and Ceiling Connection):

1. Type: Pre-compressed joint filler.

a. Seal Material: Silicone.

1) Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's standard range.

EXPANSION CONTROL 079500 - Page 9 of 15

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2. All miters and changes in direction to be field fabricated.

3. Fire-Resistance Rating: Provide joint system and fire-barrier assembly with a rating
not less than that of adjacent construction.
4. Fire Barrier: As specified in Clause 2.5.
5. Moisture Barrier: As specified in Clause 2.5.
6. Opening Width: As indicated on Structural Drawings.
7. Movement Type and Capability: As specified before in this Section.

I. Wall Corner Joint Systems:

1. Type: Vertical cover plate.

a. Exposed Metal: Aluminum.

1) Finish: Colored powder coating to match adjacent finishes as indicated

or selected.

2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Provide joint system and fire-barrier assembly with a rating
not less than that of adjacent construction.
3. Fire Barrier: As specified in Clause 2.5.
4. Moisture Barrier: As specified in Clause 2.5.
5. Opening Width: As indicated on Structural Drawings.
6. Movement Type and Capability: As specified before in this Section.

J. Soffit of Slab to Slab Joint System for all areas where no false ceiling:

1. Type: Center cover plate.

a. Exposed Metal: Aluminum.

2. Finish: Colored powder coating to match adjacent finishes as indicated or selected.

3. Opening Width: As indicated on Structural Drawings.
4. Movement Type and Capability: As specified before in this Section.

K. Floor-to-Wall and Wall to Wall Joint Systems: Where indicated, shall be from same
manufacturer of Floor-to-Floor assemblies, same series, configuration, movement capability
and finish material as adjacent floor to floor system but fabricated for floor-to-wall or wall
to wall joint systems.

1. Finish: Colored powder coating to match adjacent finishes as indicated or selected.

L. Other Expansion Joint Locations and Details: As indicated on Drawings.

2.7 EXTERIOR FAÇADE EXPANSION JOINT COVERS

A. General:

1. Comply with Façade details indicated on Drawings.

2. Coordinate with Project Specifications Sections related to the Façade works.

B. Seismic/Expansion Joint Covers:

1. Type ‘A’, “SF Series” by Construction Specialties, Inc., Architecture Intelligence or

approved equal.

EXPANSION CONTROL 079500 - Page 10 of 15

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

a. Custom color extruded Calprene 303 silicone at visible primary seal at interior
and exterior gaskets. Color: As selected by Engineer.
b. Standard black color extruded Calprene 303 silicone at non-visible secondary
seals at walls.
c. Pantographic wind load support mechanisms shall be included for joints
300mm and larger. All miters and changes in direction to be factory-fabricated
and heat-welded transitions.
d. Fire-Resistance Rating: Provide joint system and fire-barrier assembly with a
rating not less than that of adjacent construction.
e. Fire Barrier: As specified in Clause 2.5.
f. Opening Width: As indicated on Structural Drawings.
g. Movement Type and Capability: As specified before in this Section.

2. Type ‘B’, “BRJ Series” by Construction Specialties, Inc., Architecture Intelligence or

approved equal.

a. Flexible membrane cover, Type E-60 mil, EPDM (Ethylene Propylene Diene
Monomer) sheet.
b. Color white or black with stainless steel 0.45mm and 100mm wide flanges at
roofs (horizontal surface)/canopies/etc.
c. All end caps, transitions and miters to be factory-fabricated to ensure water
integrity.
d. Fire-Resistance Rating: Provide joint system and fire-barrier assembly with a
rating not less than that of adjacent construction.
e. Fire Barrier: As specified in Clause 2.5.
f. Opening Width: As indicated on Structural Drawings.
g. Movement Type and Capability: As specified before in this Section.

3. Type XLS and XLSC Series by Construction Specialties, Inc., Architecture

Intelligence or approved equal.

a. Cover panel is a structural ladder frame assembly designed to receive (glass,

aluminum, stainless steel, stone, etc. or whatever panel is adjacent to it) panels,
as shown on the Drawings.

i. Finish: As indicated on Drawings.

ii. Panel size: As shown on the Drawings.
iii. Aluminum extrusions used shall be in accordance with Article 2.5.

b. Each panel is retained by (2 each, minimum) heavy-duty magnetic closures

that allow the panel to return to nominal closure position after any movement
via a counter-weight.
c. Continuous operable hinge: stainless steel type 316.
d. Elastomeric seals installed along metal frames: preformed elastomeric
membranes or extrusions.
e. Compressions seals: ASTM D2000; preformed, rectangular elastomeric
extrusions having internal baffle system and designed to function under
compression.
f. Fire barrier: Any material or material combination, when fire-tested after
cycling, designed to resist the passage of flame and hot gases through a
movement joint and to meet performance criteria for required rating period.
g. Moisture barrier: 7-ply laminated reinforced polyethylene.
h. Other accessories: As required for complete installation.
i. For preparation, installation and protection guidelines, refer to the
Manufacturer.

EXPANSION CONTROL 079500 - Page 11 of 15

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

j. Opening Width: As indicated on Structural Drawings.

k. Movement Type and Capability: As specified before in this Section.

C. Outdoor Wall to Wall System:

1. Type: Accordion.

a. Seal Material: Santoprene.

1) Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's standard range.

2. Secondary Seal: Manufacturer's standard extruded-elastomeric seal designed to

prevent water and moisture infiltration.
3. Pantograph Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard nylon pantographic wind-load
support mechanism with stainless-steel fasteners for 12” joints and larger.
4. All miters and changes in direction to be factory fabricated, heat welded transitions.
5. Fire-Resistance Rating: Provide joint system and fire-barrier assembly with a rating
not less than that of adjacent construction.
6. Fire Barrier: As specified in Clause 2.5.
7. Opening Width: As indicated on Structural Drawings.
8. Movement Type and Capability: As specified before in this Section.

D. Outdoor Wall to Wall System:

1. Type: Vertical cover-plate.

a. Exposed Metal: Aluminum with PVDF finish.

b. Secondary Seal: 7-ply laminate reinforced Polyethylene.

2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Provide joint system and fire-barrier assembly with a rating
not less than that of adjacent construction.
3. Fire Barrier: As specified in Clause 2.5.
4. Opening Width: As indicated on Structural Drawings.
5. Movement Type and Capability: As specified before in this Section.

E. External Joint Systems for External Floor to Wall, Curb to Wall and Where indicated:

1. General: Expansion joint system shall be specially developed for installation on

external horizontal applications to insure completely watertight cover system and
sustain against imposed loads of moving traffic of different types.

2. Type: Epoxy-bonded seal.

a. Seal Material: EPDM.

1) Color: Black.

3. Load Capacity:

a. Uniform Load: (976 kg/sq. m), minimum.

b. Concentrated Load: (907 kg), minimum.
c. Maximum Deflection: (3.2 mm).

4. Attachment Method: Compressed, epoxy adhered.

5. Load Capacity: Heavy duty.

EXPANSION CONTROL 079500 - Page 12 of 15

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

6. Winged seal systems that utilize elastomeric concrete are not acceptable.
7. Fire Barrier: As specified in Clause 2.5.
8. Moisture Barrier: As specified in Clause 2.5.
9. Fire-Resistance Rating: Provide joint system and fire-barrier assembly with a rating
not less than that of adjacent construction.
10. Opening Width: As indicated on Structural Drawings.
11. Movement Type and Capability: As specified before in this Section.

F. Other Expansion Joint Locations and Details: As indicated on Drawings.

2.8 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the
range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Mill finish.

B. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

C. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

D. Powder Polyester Coating:

1. Powder Polyester Coating: Approved type to meet the requirements of AAMA 2603
consisting of powder particles of resinous material and additives to improve
performance. Coating shall pass Qualicoat class 1 standard test and shall pass 1 year
Florida test (45˚ south). The coating is to be electrostatically sprayed on the object to
produce a hard, durable coating with a minimum dry film thickness of 0.06 mm,
medium gloss.

a. Qualicoat Class: 1
b. Florida Test Exposure: 1 year
c. Minimum Thickness: 60 microns
d. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range of colors.

E. High Performance Organic Finish (PVDF): As specified for Aluminum exterior works.

2.10 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.

B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross
scratches.

EXPANSION CONTROL 079500 - Page 13 of 15

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

1. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.

2. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded
foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
3. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces and blockouts where expansion control systems will be installed for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to architectural joint system manufacturer's written

instructions.

B. Repair concrete slabs and blockouts using manufacturer's recommended repair grout of
compressive strength adequate for anticipated structural loadings.

C. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, and instructions for installing joint
systems. Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size to suit type of construction indicated and
to provide for secure attachment of joint systems.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for storing, handling, and installing
architectural joint assemblies and materials unless more stringent requirements are
indicated.

B. Metal Frames: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install joint systems.

1. Install in true alignment and proper relationship to joints and adjoining finished
surfaces measured from established lines and levels.
2. Adjust for differences between actual structural gap and nominal design gap due to
ambient temperature at time of installation. Notify Engineer where discrepancies
occur that will affect proper joint installation and performance.
3. Cut and fit ends to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal without
buckling of frames.
4. Locate in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces.
5. Heavy-Duty Systems: Repair or grout blockout as required for continuous frame
support and to bring frame to proper level. Shimming is not allowed.
6. Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 75 mm
from each end and not more than 600 mm o.c.

C. Seals in Metal Frames: Install elastomeric seals and membranes in frames to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions. Install with minimum number of end joints.

1. Provide in continuous lengths for straight sections.

EXPANSION CONTROL 079500 - Page 14 of 15

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1
Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital

2. Seal transitions according to manufacturer's written instructions. Vulcanize or heat-

weld field-spliced joints as recommended by manufacturer.
3. Installation: Mechanically lock seals into frames or adhere to frames with adhesive
or pressure-sensitive tape as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Compression Seals: Apply adhesive or lubricant adhesive as recommended by

manufacturer to both frame interfaces before installing compression seals.

E. Foam Seals: Install with adhesive recommended by manufacturer.

F. Terminate exposed ends of joint assemblies with field- or factory-fabricated termination

devices.

G. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Coordinate installation of architectural joint assembly

materials and associated work so complete assemblies comply with assembly performance
requirements.

1. Fire Barriers: Install fire barriers to provide continuous, uninterrupted fire resistance
throughout length of joint, including transitions and field splices.

H. Water Barrier: Provide water barrier at exterior joints and where called for on Drawings.
Provide drainage fittings at a maximum of 15.2 m or where indicated.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areas is complete. When
protective covering is removed, clean exposed metal surfaces to comply with manufacturer's
written instructions.

B. Protect the installation from damage by work of other Sections. Where necessary due to
heavy construction traffic, remove and properly store cover plates or seals and install
temporary protection over joints. Reinstall cover plates or seals prior to Substantial
Completion of the Work.

END OF SECTION 079500

EXPANSION CONTROL 079500 - Page 15 of 15

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-AR-01 REV 1